(Ebook) - Engineering - MSC Patran MSC Nastran Preference Guide - Volume 1 - Structural Analysis

C O N T E N T S
MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide Volume 1: Structural Analysis

CHAPTER
MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide, Volume 1: Structural Analysis
1
Overview
s s
Purpose, 2 MSC.Nastran Product Information, 3
2
Building A Model
s s s
Introduction to Building a Model, 6 Currently Supported MSC.Nastran Input Options, 8 Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference, 11 Coordinate Frames, 15 Finite Elements, 16 Nodes, 17 Elements, 18 Multi-point Constraints, 19 - Degrees of Freedom, 22 Superelements, 34 - Select Boundary Nodes, 35 Material Library, 36 Materials Form, 37 - Isotropic, 42 - 2D Orthotropic, - 3D Orthotropic, - 2D Anisotropic, - 3D Anisotropic, - Composite, 61 - Laminated, 62
s s
54 58 59 60
Element Properties, 63 Element Properties Form, 64 - Coupled Point Mass (CONM1), 67 - Grounded Scalar Mass (CMASS1), 69 - Lumped Point Mass (CONM2), 70 - Grounded Scalar Spring (CELAS1), 72 - Grounded Scalar Damper (CDAMP1), 73 - Bush, 74 - General Section Beam (CBAR), 77 - P-Formulation General Beam (CBEAM), 80 - Curved General Section Beam (CBEND), 84 - Curved Pipe Section Beam (CBEND), 86
Lumped Area Beam (CBEAM/PBCOMP), 88 Tapered Beam (CBEAM), 90 General Section (CBEAM), 93 General Section Rod (CROD), 98 General Section Rod (CONROD), 99 Pipe Section Rod (CTUBE), 100 Scalar Spring (CELAS1), 101 Scalar Damper (CDAMP1), 102 Viscous Damper (CVISC), 103 Gap (CGAP), 104 Scalar Mass (CMASS1), 106 PLOTEL, 107 Scalar Bush, 108 Standard Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4), 111 Revised Homogeneous Plate (CQUADR), 113 P-Formulation Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4), 114 Standard Laminate Plate (CQUAD4/PCOMP), 116 Revised Laminate Plate (CQUADR/PCOMP), 117 Standard Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4), 118 Revised Equivalent Section Plate (CQUADR), 120 P-Formulation Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4), 122 Standard Bending Panel (CQUAD4), 125 Revised Bending Panel (CQUADR), 127 P-Formulation Bending Panel (CQUAD4), 128 Axisymmetric Solid (CTRIAX6), 130 Standard Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4), 131 Revised Plane Strain Solid (CQUADR), 132 P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4), 133 Standard Membrane (CQUAD4), 135 Revised Membrane (CQUADR), 136 P-Formulation Membrane (CQUAD4), 137 Shear Panel (CSHEAR), 139 Solid (CHEXA), 140 P-Formulation Solid (CHEXA), 141 Hyperelastic Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4), 143 Hyperelastic Axisym Solid (CTRIAX6), 144 Hyperelastic Solid (CHEXA), 145
Beam Modeling, 146 Cross Section Definition, 146 Cross Section Orientation, 150 Cross Section End Offsets, 151 Stiffened Cylinder Example, 152 Loads and Boundary Conditions, 153 Loads & Boundary Conditions Form, 154 - Object Tables, 158 Load Cases, 167 Defining Contact Regions, 168 Contact, 169
s s
3
Running an Analysis
s
Review of the Analysis Form, 172 Analysis Form, 173 Overview of Analysis Job Definition and Submittal, 175 Translation Parameters, 176 Translation Parameters, 177 Numbering Options, 178 Select File, 179 Solution Types, 180 Direct Text Input, 182 Solution Parameters, 183 Linear Static, 183 Nonlinear Static, 186 Normal Modes, 188 Buckling, 194 Complex Eigenvalue, 198 Frequency Response, 203 Transient Response, 206 Nonlinear Transient, 209 Subcases, 211 Deleting Subcases, 212 Editing Subcases, 213 Subcase Parameters, 214 Linear Static Subcase Parameters, 215 Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters, 216 Arc-Length Method Parameters, 218 Subcases Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters, 219 Normal Modes Subcase Parameters, 221 Transient Response Subcase Parameters, 223 Frequency Response Subcase Parameters, 226 Output Requests, 231 Basic Output Requests, 232 Advanced Output Requests, 233 Edit Output Requests Form, 242 Default Output Request Information, 244 - Subcases Direct Text Input, 247 Select Superelements, 248 Select Explicit MPCs..., 249 Subcase Select, 250 Restart Parameters, 251 Optimize, 254 Optimization Parameters, 255 Subcases, 256 - Subcase Parameters, 257 Subcase Select Optimize, 258 Interactive Analysis, 259
s s s
s s s s s
Analysis Form, 261 Select Modal Results .DBALL, 262 Loading Form, 263 Create a Field Form, 265 Output Selection Form, 266 Define Frequencies Form, 267
4
Read Results
s s s s s
Overview of Reading Results, 270 Read Output2, 271 Attach XDB, 274 Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities, 277 Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities, 285
5
Read Input File
s
Review of Read Input File Form, 312 Read Input File Form, 313 Entity Selection Form, 314 Define Offsets Form, 316 Selection of Input File, 317 Summary Data Form, 318 Reject Card Form, 319 Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File, 320 Coordinate Systems, 321 Grids and SPOINTs, 322 Elements and Element Properties, 323 Materials, 327 MPCs, 328 Load Sets, 329 TABLES, 331 Conflict Resolution, 332 Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by IDs, 332 Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by Names, 332
6
Delete
s s
Review of Delete Form, 334 Deleting an MSC.Nastran Job, 335
7
Files
s
Files, 338
8
Errors/Warnings
s
Errors/Warnings, 342
A
Preference Configuration and Implementation
s s s
Software Components in MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran, 344 MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Components, 345 Configuring the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Execute File, 348 MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide, 349 Volume 1: Structural Analysis
INDEX
CHAPTER
Overview
s Purpose s MSC.Nastran Product Information
1.1
Purpose
MSC.Patran is an analysis software system developed and maintained by MSC.Software Corporation. The core of the system is a finite element analysis pre and postprocessor. Several optional products are available including; advanced postprocessing programs, tightly coupled solvers, and interfaces to third party solvers. This document describes one of these interfaces. The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface provides a communication link between MSC.Patran and MSC.Nastran. It also provides for the customization of certain features in MSC.Patran. The interface is a fully integrated part of the MSC.Patran system. Selecting MSC.Nastran as the analysis code preference in MSC.Patran, activates the customization process. These customizations ensure that sufficient and appropriate data is generated for the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface. Specifically, the MSC.Patran forms in these main areas are modified:
Materials Element Properties Finite Elements/MPCs and Meshing Loads and Boundary Conditions Analysis Forms
More information on these topics is contained in Preference Configuration and Implementation (App. A).
CHAPTER 1
Overview
1.2
MSC.Nastran Product Information

MSC.Nastran is a general-purpose finite element computer program for engineering analyses. It is developed, supported, and maintained by MSC.Software Corporation, 815 West Colorado Boulevard, Los Angeles, California 90041, (323) 258-9111. See the MSC.Nastran Users Manual, Volume 1, for a general description of MSC.Nastrans capabilities.
MSC/PATRAN MSC/NASTRAN Preference Guide, Volume 1: Structural Analysis
CHAPTER
Building A Model
s Introduction to Building a Model s Currently Supported MSC.Nastran Input Options s Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference s Coordinate Frames s Finite Elements s Material Library s Element Properties s Beam Modeling s Loads and Boundary Conditions s Load Cases s Defining Contact Regions
2.1
Introduction to Building a Model

There are many aspects to building a finite element analysis model. In several cases, the forms used to create the finite element data are dependent on the selected analysis code and analysis type. Other parts of the model are created using standard forms. The Analysis option on the Preferences menu brings up a form where the user can select the analysis code (e.g., MSC .Nastran) and analysis type (e.g., Structural).
MSC.Patran
File Group Viewport Viewing Display Preferences Tools Insight Control Help
Preferences Geometry FEM LBCs Matls Properties Load CasesFields Analysis Results Insight XYPlot Analysis... Global... Graphics... Mouse... Key Map... Picking... Report... Geometry... Finite Element... Insight... Hide Icon Help Main Form...
$# Session file patran.ses.01 started recording at 25 $# Recorded by MSC.Patran 03:36:58 PM $# FLEXlm Initialization complete. Acquiring license(s)... hp, 2
The analysis code may be changed at any time during model creation.This is especially useful if the model is to be used for different analyses in different analysis codes. As much data as possible will be converted if the analysis code is changed after the modeling process has begun. The analysis option defines what will be presented to the user in several areas during the subsequent modeling steps.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
These areas include the material and element libraries, including multi-point constraints, the applicable loads and boundary conditions, and the analysis forms. The selected Analysis Type may also affect the allowable selections in these same areas. For more details, see The Analysis Form (Ch. 2) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Analysis Application. Analysis Preference
Analysis Code: MSC.Nastran Analysis Type: Structural Input File Suffix: .bdf Output File Suffix: .op2 Indicates the file suffixes used in creating file names for MSC.Nastran input and output files. The only currently supported Analysis Type for MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran is Structural. To use the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Application Preference, this should be set to MSC.Nastran.
OK
2.2
Currently Supported MSC.Nastran Input Options

The following tables summarize all the various MSC. Nastran commands supported by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Application Preference. The tables indicate where to find more information in this manual on how the commands are supported. Supported MSC.Nastran File Management Commands Command
ASSIGN
Description An ASSIGN command is used to assign a particular name (job name + user specified MSC .Nastran results suffix) to the MSC .Nastran OUTPUT2 file to be created during the analysis.
Supported MSC.Nastran Executive Control Commands Command

ECHO SOL TIME
Pages 183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209 180 183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209
Supported MSC.Nastran Case Control Commands
Command
ACCELERATION ADACT ADAPT DATAREC DISPLACEMENT ELSDCON ESE FORCE
Pages 203, 206 13, 215 12, 141 13 183, 194, 203, 206 183 183 183, 188, 194, 201, 203, 206 203 233 183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209 233
Command
OLOAD SPCFORCES
Pages 183, 194, 203, 206 183, 188, 194, 201, 203, 206 183, 188, 194, 201, 203, 206 183, 188, 194, 201, 203, 206 188, 194 203, 206 183 183 233 234 234 234
STRAIN
STRESS
VECTOR VELOCITY GPSDCON GPFORCE NLLOAD SET SURFACE VOLUME
FREQUENCY GPSTRESS MAXLINES
MPCFORCES
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Supported MSC.Nastran Bulk Data Entries
Command
ADAPT BCONP BFRIC BFRIC CBARAO CBAR CBEAM CBEND CDAMP1 CDAMP2 CELAS1 CELAS2 CGAP CHEXA CMASS1 CMASS2 CONM1 CONM2 CONROD CPENTA CQUAD4 CQUAD8 CQUADR CROD CSHEAR CTETRA CTRIAX6 CTUBE
Pages 12, 141, 180, 186 169
Command
CVISC DYNRED EIGB
Pages 103 193 196, 191 201 191 191 11 11 159 203 158 163 159 312 312 312 312 312 23 216 13, 233 183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209 183 183 183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209 183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209
169 169 77
EIGC EIGR EIGRL
77 88, 90
FEFACE FEEDGE
84, 86
FORCE
73 177, 326
FREQ1 GMBC
72
GRAV
177, 326 104
MOMENT MAT1
140
MAT2
106 177, 326
MAT3 MAT8
67
MAT9
70 99
MPC NLPARM
140
OUTPUT
111, 118, 125, 131, 135 111, 118, 125, 131, 135 113, 120, 127, 132, 136 98 139 140 130 100
PARAM, AUTOSPC PARAM, INREL PARAM, ALTRED PARAM, COUPMASS PARAM, K6ROT
Command
PARAM, WTMASS PARAM, GRDPNT PARAM, LGDISP PARAM,G PARAM,W3 PARAM,W4 PARAM, POST PBAR PBCOMP PBEAM PBEND PCOMP PDAMP PELAS PGAP PLOAD1 PLOAD2 PLOAD4 PLOADX1 PLOTEL PMASS POINT PROD
Pages 183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209 183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209 186, 209 198, 203, 206, 209 206, 209 206, 209 176 77 88 90 84, 86 116, 117 73 72 104 165 159 159 159, 149 107 106 11, 141 98
Command
PSHEAR PSHELL
Pages 139 111, 113, 118, 120, 125, 127, 131, 132, 135, 136 140 100 90 11, 141 103 25 26 27 28 163 29 30 31 34 158 158 161 146 161 161 164, 164 206 209, 219
PSOLID PTUBE PBEAM PVAL PVISC RBAR RBE1 RBE2 RBE3 RFORCE RROD RSPLINE RTRPLT SESET SPC1 SPCD TEMP TEMPF TEMPRB TEMPP1 TIC TSTEP TSTEPNL
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
2.3
Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference

In Version 68 of MSC .Nastran, MSC introduced p-adaptive analysis using solid elements. The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference provides support for this new capability. There are some fundamental differences in approach to model building and results import for p-element analyses; this section will serve as a guide to these. MSC .Nastran Version 69 extends the Version 68 capabilities for p-adaptive analysis in two areas. Shell and beam elements have been added and p-shells and p-beams can be used for linear dynamic solution sequences. MSC.Patran Version 6.0 supports both of these capabilities. Element Creation. MSC . Nastran supports adaptive, p-element analyses with the 3D-solid CTETRA, CPENTA, and CHEXA elements; 2D-solid TRIA, and QUAD elements; shells TRIA, and QUAD elements; beams BAR elements. MSC.Patran and MSC .Nastran allow TET4, TET10, TET16, TET40, WEDGE6, WEDGE15, WEDGE52, HEX8, HEX20, and HEX64 for p-adaptive analysis for 3D-solids; TRIA3, TRIA6, TRIA7, TRIA9, TRIA13, QUAD4, QUAD8, QUAD9, QUAD12, and QUAD16 for p-adaptive analysis for 2D-solids and membranes; TRIA3, TRIA6, TRIA7, TRIA9, TRIA13, QUAD4, QUAD8, QUAD9, QUAD12, and QUAD16 for p-adaptive analysis for shells; BAR2, BAR3, and BAR4 for p-adaptive analysis for beams. The preferred approach, when beginning a new model, is to use the higher-order elements--HEX64, WEDGE52, TET40, and TET16, or TRIA13 and QUAD16, or BAR4. The support for lower-order elements is provided primarily to support existing models. The higher-order cubic elements allow more accurate definition of the geometry and more accurate postprocessing of results from the MSC .Nastran analysis.The translator generates the appropriate MSC .Nastran FEEDGE and POINT entities for all curved edges on the p-elements. Models with HEX64 and WEDGE52 elements are easily created with the MSC.Patran Iso Mesher; models with TET16 elements can be created with the Tet Mesher. Models with QUAD16 and TRIA13 elements can be created using the Iso Mesher or the Paver. For p-elements, MSC.Patran generates cubic edges to fit the underlying geometry. The cubic edge consists of two vertex grid points and two points in between. Adjacent cubic edges are not necessarily C1 continuous. If the original geometry is smooth, the cubic edges may introduce kinks which cause false stress concentrations. Then, the p-element produces unrealistic results especially for thin curved shells. In Version 7 of MSC.Patran, for cubic elements, the two midside nodes on each edge are adjusted so that the edges of adjacent elements are C1 continuous. The adjustment is done in the Pat3Nas translator. After the Pat3Nas translator is executed, the location of the two midside nodes in the MSC.Patran database has changed. The user is informed with a warning message. The user can turn the adjustment of midside nodes ON and OFF with the environment variable PEDGE_MOVE. By default, the midside nodes are adjusted to make the adjacent elements C1 continuous. For PEDGE_MOVE set to OFF, the points on a cubic edge are not adjusted. MSC.Patran generates the input for MSC .Nastran. For cubic edges, FEEDGE bulk data entries with POINTs are written. By default, the location of the two POINTs is moved to 1/3 and 2/3 of the edge in MSC.Nastran. The points generated by MSC.Patran must not be moved. Therefore, a parameter entry PARAM, PEDGEP, 1 is written by MSC.Patran. PEDGEP=1 indicates that incoming POINTs are not moved in MSC .Nastran. The default is PEDGEP= 0, MSC . Nastran will move the two POINTs to 1/3 and 2/3 of the edge. The C1 continuous cubic edges improve the accuracy of p-element results.
In the Version 69 Release Guide, a cylinder under internal pressure was tested to determine the quality of shell p-elements for curved geometry. The accuracy of the results was very good when exact geometry was used. With C1 continuous edges we recover the same quality of results within single precision accuracy. Element and p-Formulation Properties. Both element and p-formulation properties are defined using the Element Properties application by choosing Action: Create, Dimension: 1D/2D/ or 3D, Type: Beam/Shell/Bending Panel/2D Solid/Membrane/ or Solid, and pFormulation on the main form. The details of the property form for this case are described on (p. 141). Most of the properties are optional and have defaults; the material property name is required. Two properties that may need to be defined are Starting P-orders and Maximum P-orders. These properties specify the polynomial orders for the element interpolation functions in the three spatial directions. Although these are integer values, in MSC.Patran, each property is defined using the MSC.Patran vector definition. At first, this may seem peculiar, but it gives the user access to many useful tools in the MSC.Patran system for defining and manipulating these properties. Typically, a user would define these properties with a syntax like <3 4 2> to prescribe polynomial orders of 3, 4, and 2 in the X, Y, and Z directions. MSC.Patran will convert these values to floating point <3. 4. 2.>, but the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference will interpret them. This vector syntax is convenient primarily because it allows these properties to be defined using the Fields application. In a case where the material properties are constant over the model, but it is desirable to prescribe a distribution of p-orders, vector fields can be defined and specified in a single property definition. The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference will provide additional help for this modeling function. At the end of an adaptive analysis, when results are imported, vector, spatial fields will optionally be created containing the p-orders used for each element for each adaptive cycle. To repeat a single adaptive cycle, it is necessary only to modify the element properties by selecting the appropriate field. A common use of the Maximum P-orders property is in dealing with elements in the vicinity of stress singularities. These singularities may be caused by the modeling of the geometry (e.g., sharp corners), boundary conditions (e.g., point constraints), or applied forces (e.g., point forces). Sometimes it is easier to tell the adaptive analysis to ignore these singular regions than it is to change the model. This can be done by setting the Maximum P-orders property for elements in this region to low values (e.g., <1 1 1> or <2 2 2>. These elements are sometimes called sacrificial elements. Loads and Boundary Conditions. It is well known in solid mechanics that point forces and constraints cause the stress field in the body to become infinite. In p-adaptive analyses, care must be taken in finite element creation and loads application to ensure that these artificial high-stress regions dont dominate the analysis. Generally, the best results are obtained with distributed loads (pressures) or distributed displacements. There are two options under Loads/BCs for applying distributed displacements. The Element Uniform and Element Variable types under Displacements allow displacement constraints to be applied to the faces of solid elements. If the elements are p-elements, the appropriate FEFACE and GMBC entries are produced. If applied to non-p-elements, the appropriate SPC1 or SPCD entries are produced. Several new loads and boundary conditions support the p-shell and p-beam elements. Distributed loads can be applied to beam elements or to the edge of shell elements. Pressure loads can be applied to the faces of p-shell elements. Temperature loads can be applied to either the nodes or the elements.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Analysis Definition. Adaptive linear static and normal modes analyses are supported in Version 68 of MSC. Nastran; both solution types are supported by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference. Only a few parameters on the Analysis forms may need to be changed for p-element analyses. If running a version of MSC .Nastran prior to Version 68.2 (i.e., Version 68, or 68.1), the OUTPUT2 Request option on the Translation Parameters form must be set to Alter File in order to process the results in MSC.Patran. The Solution Parameters forms for the linear static and normal modes analyses contain a Max p-Adaptive Cycles option, which is defaulted to 3. The Subcase Parameters form under Subcase Create has options to limit the participation of this subcase in the adaptive error analysis. Finally, the Advanced Output Requests form under Subcase Create has an option to define whether results are to be produced for all adaptive cycles or only every nth adaptive cycle. Results Import and Postprocessing. Two different approaches are provided for postprocessing results from MSC .Nastran p-element analyses. Both approaches rely on MSC . Nastran creating results for a VU mesh where each p-element is automatically subdivided into a number of smaller elements. In the standard approach with the default MSC .Nastran VU mesh (3 x 3 x 3 elements) for solids, (3 x 3 elements) for shells and (3 elements) for beams, the results will automatically be mapped onto the MSC.Patran nodes and elements during import. This mapping will occur for all 10, MSC.Patran solid element topologies mentioned above. The most accurate mapping and postprocessing takes place when results are mapped to the higher-order MSC.Patran elements. When the adaptive analysis process increases the p-orders in one or more elements beyond 3, the 3 x 3 x 3 VU mesh, mapping, and postprocessing may not be sufficiently accurate. The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference provides a second approach to handle this situation. In this case, a user can specify a higher-order VU mesh (e.g. 5 x 5 x 5) on the MSC .Nastran OUTRCV entry and then import both model data and results entities into a new, empty MSC.Patran database. In this case, the VU mesh and results are imported directly, rather than mapped and can be post-processed with greater accuracy. The OUTRCV entry is currently supported only with the Bulk Data Include File option on the Translation Parameters form. It should be noted that, with this import mode, displays of element results (e.g., fringe plots) may be discontinuous across parent, p-element boundaries. This occurs because the VU grids generated by MSC .Nastran are different in each p-element. Along element boundaries there are coincident nodes and a result associated with each one. The user should not try to perform an Equivalence operation to remove these coincident nodes. If this is done, subsequent postprocessing operations will likely be incorrect. For both postprocessing options, a result case is created for each adaptive cycle in the analysis. The result types in this result case will depend on specific options selected on the Output Request form. By default, the Adaptive Cycle Output Interval option is equal to zero. This means that output quantities specific to p-elements will be written only for the last cycle. If postprocessing of results from intermediate cycles is desired, the Adaptive Cycle Output Interval option should be set equal to one. One of the key uses of output from intermediate adaptive cycles is in examining the convergence of selected quantities (e.g., stresses). This can be done using the X-Y plotting capability under the Results application. Potential Pitfalls. There are several areas where a user can encounter problems producing correct p-element models for MSC .Nastran. One is the incorrect usage of the midside nodes in the MSC.Patran higher order-elements. These nodes are used in p-element analysis only for defining the element geometry; analysis degrees of freedom are not associated with these nodes. Therefore it is illegal, for example, to attach non p-elements to assign loads or boundary
conditions to these nodes. One way this can occur inadvertently is if a nodal force is applied to the face of a MSC.Patran solid. This force is interpreted as a point force at every node (including the midside nodes) on the face of the solid. For the p-elements, this is not valid. This type of load should instead be applied as an element uniform or element variable pressure. Adaptive Analysis of Existing Models. Modifying an existing solid model for adaptive, pelement analysis is relatively straightforward. The first step is to read the NASTRAN input file into MSC.Patran using the Analysis/Read Input File option. The model may contain any combination of linear or quadratic tetra, penta, or hexa elements. The second step is to use the Element Props/Modify function to change the Option for all solid properties from Standard Formulation to P-Formulation. The element properties form for p-formulation solids has many options specific to p-element analysis; but they all have appropriate defaults. This property modification step is the only change that must be made before submitting the model for analysis. Often, however, as discussed in Potential Pitfalls (p. 13), it is appropriate to modify the types of loads and boundary conditions applied to the model. For example, in non p-element models, displacement constraints are applied using MSC .Nastran SPC entries at grid points. In pelement analyses, element-oriented displacement constraints are more appropriate. Existing displacement LBCs can be modified using the Loads/BCs/Modify/Displacement option. For an SPC type of displacement constraint, the LBC type is nodal. For a p-element analysis, Element Uniform or Element Variable displacement constraints are more appropriate. The application region must be changed from a selection of nodes to a selection of element faces. As described above, nodal forces can be troublesome in p-element analyses. If possible, it is beneficial to redefine point forces as pressures acting on an element face. If this is not possible, an alternative is to limit the p-orders in the elements connected to the node with the point force; this can be done by defining a new element property for these elements and defining the Maximum Porders vector appropriately. Element pressures, inertial loads, and nodal temperatures defined in the original model need not be changed for the p-element analysis.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
2.4
Coordinate Frames
Coordinate frames will generate a unique CORD2R, CORD2C, or CORD2S Bulk Data entry, depending on the specified coordinate frame type. The CID field is defined by the Coord ID assigned in MSC.Patran. The RID field may or may not be defined, depending on the coordinate frame construction method used in MSC.Patran. The A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3, C1, C2, and C3 fields are derived from the coordinate frame definition in MSC.Patran.
MSC.Patran
Geometry FEM LBCs Matls Properties Load CasesFields Analysis Results Insight XYPlot
Only Coordinate Frames that are referenced by nodes, element properties, or loads and boundary conditions can be translated. For more information on creating coordinate frames see Creating Coordinate Frames (p. 350) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling. To output all the coordinate frames defined in the model whether referenced or not, set the environment variable WRITE_ALL_COORDS to ON.
2.5
Finite Elements
The Finite Elements Application in MSC.Patran allows the definition of basic finite element construction. Created under Finite Elements are the nodes, element topology, multi-point constraints, and Superelement.
MSC.Patran
For more information on how to create finite element meshes, see Mesh Seed and Mesh Forms (p. 29) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Nodes
Nodes in MSC.Patran will generate unique GRID Bulk Data entries in MSC .Nastran. Nodes can be created either directly using the Node object, or indirectly using the Mesh object. Each node has associated Reference (CP) and Analysis (CD) coordinate frames. The ID is taken directly from the assigned node ID. The X1, X2, and X3 fields are defined in the specified CP coordinate frame. If no reference frame is assigned, the global system is used. The PS and SEID fields on the GRID entry are left blank. Finite Elements
Action: Object: Method: Create Node Edit
Node Id List 1
Analysis Coordinate Frame Coord 0 Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0 The analysis frame (CD of the GRID) is the coordinate system in which the displacements, degrees of freedom, constraints, and solution vector are defined. The coordinate system in which the node location is defined (CP of the GRID) can be either the reference coordinate frame, the analysis coordinate frame, or a global reference (blank), depending on the value of the forward translation parameter Node Coordinates.
Associate with Geometry Auto Execute Node Location List [0 0 0]
-Apply-
Elements
The Finite Elements Application in MSC.Patran assigns element connectivity, such as Quad4, for standard finite elements. The type of MSC . Nastran element to be created is not determined until the element properties are assigned. See the Element Properties Form (p. 64) for details concerning the MSC.Nastran element types. Elements can be created either directly using the Element object, or indirectly using the Mesh object. Finite Elements
Action: Object: Type: Output Ids Node Id List 1 Element Id List 1 Global Edge Length 0.1 Element Topology Quad4 Quad5 Quad8 Mesher Elements not referenced by an element property region that is understood by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran forward translator will not be translated. Create Mesh Surface
x IsoMesh
x Paver x
IsoMesh Parameters... Node Coordinate Frames... Surface List
-Apply-
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Multi-point Constraints
Multi-point constraints (MPCs) can also be created from the Finite Elements Application. These are special element types that define a rigorous behavior between several specified nodes. The forms for creating MPCs are found by selecting MPC as the Object on the Finite Elements form. The full functionality of the MPC forms are defined in The Create Action (FEM Entities). Finite Elements Finite Elements
Action: Action: Object: Object: Type: Type: MPC ID MPC ID 1 1 Constant Term Used to specify the ID to associate to the MPC when it is created. Create Create MPC MPC Explicit Explicit
Define Terms... Define Terms...
MPC Types. To create an MPC, first select the type of MPC to be created from the option menu. The MPC types that appear in the option menu are dependent on the current settings of the Analysis Code and Analysis Type preferences. The following table describes the MPC types which are supported for MSC .Nastran. Analysis Type Structural
MPC Type Explicit
Description Creates an explicit MPC between a dependent degree of freedom and one or more independent degrees of freedom. The dependent term consists of a node ID and a degree of freedom, while an independent term consists of a coefficient, a node ID, and a degree of freedom. An unlimited number of independent terms can be specified, while only one dependent term can be specified. The constant term is not allowed in MSC . Nastran. Creates an RSSCON type MPC between a dependent node on a linear 2D plate element and two independent nodes on a linear 3D solid element to connect the plate element to the solid element. One dependent and two independent terms can be specified. Each term consists of a single node.
Linear SurfVol
Structural
MPC Type Rigid (Fixed)
Analysis Type Structural
Description Creates a rigid MPC between one independent node and one or more dependent nodes in which all six structural degrees of freedom are rigidly attached to each other. An unlimited number of dependent terms can be specified, while only one independent term can be specified. Each term consists of a single node. There is no constant term for this MPC type. Creates an RBAR element, which defines a rigid bar between two nodes. Up to two dependent and two independent terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. The nodes specified in the two dependent terms must be the same as the nodes specified in the two independent terms. Any combination of the degrees of freedom of the two nodes can be specified as independent as long as the total number of independent degrees of freedom adds up to six. There is no constant term for this MPC type. Creates an RBE1 element, which defines a rigid body connected to an arbitrary number of nodes. An arbitrary number of dependent terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. Any number of independent terms can be specified as long as the total number of degrees of freedom specified in all of the independent terms adds up to six. Since at least one degree of freedom must be specified for each term there is no way the user can create more that six independent terms. There is no constant term for this MPC type. Creates an RBE2 element, which defines a rigid body between an arbitrary number of nodes. Although the user can only specify one dependent term, an arbitrary number of nodes can be associated to this term. The user is also prompted to associate a list of degrees of freedom to this term. A single independent term can be specified, which consists of a single node. There is no constant term for this MPC type. Creates an RBE3 element, which defines the motion of a reference node as the weighted average of the motions of a set of nodes. An arbitrary number of dependent terms can be specified, each term consisting of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. The first dependent term is used to define the reference node. The other dependent terms define additional node/degrees of freedom, which are added to the m-set. An arbitrary number of independent terms can also be specified. Each independent term consists of a constant coefficient (weighting factor), a node, and a list of degrees of freedom. There is no constant term for this MPC type.
RBAR
Structural
RBE1
Structural
RBE2
Structural
RBE3
Structural
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
MPC Type RROD
Description Creates an RROD element, which defines a pinned rod between two nodes that is rigid in extension. One dependent term is specified, which consists of a node and a single translational degree of freedom. One independent term is specified, which consists of a single node. There is no constant term for this MPC type. Creates an RSPLINE element, which interpolates the displacements of a set of independent nodes to define the displacements at a set of dependent nodes using elastic beam equations. An arbitrary number of dependent terms can be specified. Each dependent term consists of a node, a list of degrees of freedom, and a sequence number. An arbitrary number of independent nodes (minimum of two) can be specified. Each independent term consists of a node and a sequence number. The sequence number is used to order the dependent and independent terms with respect to each other. The only restriction is that the first and the last terms in the sequence must be independent terms. A constant term, called D/L Ratio, must also be specified. Creates an RTRPLT element, which defines a rigid triangular plate between three nodes. Up to three dependent and three independent terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. The nodes specified in the three dependent terms must be the same as the nodes specified in the three independent terms. Any combination of the degrees of freedom of the three nodes can be specified as independent as long as the total number of independent degrees of freedom adds up to six. There is no constant term for this MPC type. Describes cyclic symmetry boundary conditions for a segment of the model. If a cyclic symmetry solution sequence is chosen, such as SOL 114, then CYJOIN, CYAX and CYSYM entries are created. If a solution sequence that is not explicitly cyclic symmetric is chosen, such as SOL 101, MPC and SPC cards are created. Be careful, for this option automatically alters the analysis coordinate references of the nodes involved. This could erroneously change the meaning of previously applied load and boundary conditions, as well as element properties. Describes the boundary conditions of sliding surfaces, such as pipe sleeves. These boundary conditions are written to the NASTRAN input file as explicit MPCs. Be careful, for this option automatically redefines the analysis coordinate references of all affected nodes. This could erroneously alter the meaning of previously applied load and boundary conditions, as well as element properties.
RSPLINE
Structural
RTRPLT
Structural
Cyclic Symmetry
Structural
Sliding Surface
Structural
Degrees of Freedom
Whenever a list of degrees of freedom is expected for an MPC term, a listbox containing the valid degrees of freedom is displayed on the form. The following degrees of freedom are supported by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran MPCs for the various analysis types: Degree of freedom UX UY UZ RX RY RZ Analysis Type Structural Structural Structural Structural Structural Structural
Note: Care must be taken to make sure that a degree of freedom that is selected for an MPC actually exists at the nodes. For example, a node that is attached only to solid structural elements will not have any rotational degrees of freedom. However, MSC.Patran will allow you to select rotational degrees of freedom at this node when defining an MPC.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Explicit MPCs This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and Explicit is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC . Nastran MPC Bulk Data entry. The difference in explicit MPC equations between MSC.Patran and MSC . Nastran will result in the A1 field of the MSC .Nastran entry being set to -1.0. Define Terms
Dependent Terms (1) Nodes (1) 14 UX DOFs (1) Holds the dependent term information. This term will define the fields for G1 and C1 on the MPC entry. Only one node and DOF combination may be defined for any given explicit MPC. The A1 field on the MPC entry is automatically set to -1.0.
Independent Terms (No Max) Coefficient 1. -3.4000> Nodes (1) 7 12 DOF (1) UY UZ Holds the independent term information. These terms define the Gi, Ci, and Ai fields on the MPC entry, where i is greater than one. As many coefficient, node, and DOF combinations as desired may be defined.
x Create Dependent x x Create Independent

Coefficient = Auto Execute Node List Node 12 -3.4
x Modify x x Delete x
DOFs UX UY UZ
Apply
Clear
Cancel
Rigid (Fixed) This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and Rigid (Fixed) is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC. Nastran RBE2 Bulk Data entry. The CM field on the RBE2 entry will always be 123456. Define Terms
Dependent Terms (No Max) Nodes (1) 14 10 6 Holds the dependent term information. This term defines the GMi fields on the RBE2 entry. As many nodes as desired may be selected as dependent terms.
Independent Terms (1) Nodes (1) 4 Holds the independent term information. This term defines the GN field on the RBE2 entry. Only one node may be selected.
x Create Dependent x Create Independent x

Auto Execute Node List Node 4
Apply
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
RBAR MPCs This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and RBAR is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC .Nastran RBAR Bulk Data entry and defines a rigid bar with six degrees of freedom at each end. Both the Dependent Terms and the Independent Terms lists can have either 1 or 2 node references. The total number of referenced nodes, however, must be 2. If either or both of these lists references 2 nodes, then there must be an overlap in the list of referenced nodes. Define Terms
Dependent Terms (Min =1, Max = 2) Nodes 1
(1)
DOFs (Max=6) UX
Holds the dependent term information. Either one or two nodes may be defined as having dependent terms. The Nodes define the GA and GB fields on the RBAR entry. The DOFs define the CMA and CMB fields.
Independent Terms (Min = 1, Max = 2) Nodes 1 2
(1)
DOFs (Max =6) UY UZ RX UX UY UZ Holds the independent term information. Either one or two nodes may be defined as having independent terms.The Nodes define the GA and GB fields on the RBAR entry.The DOFs define the CNA and CNB fields.
x Create Dependent x x Create Independent x

Auto Execute Node List Node 2 DOFs UX UY UZ
x Modify x x Delete
Apply
Clear
Cancel
RBE1 MPCs This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and RBE1 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC .Nastran RBE1 Bulk Data entry. Define Terms
Dependent Terms (No Max) Nodes 1 1 12
(1)
DOFs (Max=6) UX UZ UY RY RZ UX
Holds the dependent term information. Defines the GMi and CMi fields on the RBE1 entry. An unlimited number of nodes and DOFs may be defined here.
Independent Terms (Min = 1, Max = 6) Nodes 1 2
(1)
DOFs (Max =6) UY UZ RX UX UY UZ Holds the independent term information. Defines the GNi and CNi fields on the RBE1 entry. The total number of Node/DOF pairs defined must equal 6, and be capable of representing any general rigid body motion.

Auto Execute Node List Node 2 DOFs UX UY UZ
x Modify x Delete x
Apply
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
RBE2 MPCs This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and RBE2 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC .Nastran RBE2 Bulk Data entry. Define Terms
Dependent Terms (1) Nodes (No Max) 1,10,:14:2,15> DOFs (Max=6) UX UZ Holds the dependent term information. This term defines the GMi and CM fields on the RBE2 entry. As many nodes as desired may be selected as dependent terms.
Independent Terms (1) Nodes (1) 8 Holds the independent term information. This term defines the GN field on the RBE2 entry. Only one node may be selected.

Auto Execute Node List Node 1,10:14:2,15,16 DOFs UX UY UZ
x Modify x Delete x
Apply
Clear
Cancel
RBE3 MPCs This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and RBE3 is the selected type. This form is used to create a MSC .Nastran RBE3 Bulk Data entry. Define Terms
Dependent Terms (No Max) Nodes 10 11
(1)
DOFs (Max=6) UX UY UZ RX UX UY UZ RX Holds the dependent term information. Defines the GMi and CMi fields on the RBE3 entry. The first dependent term will be treated as the reference node, REFGRID and REFC. The rest of the dependent terms become the GMi and CMi components.
Independent Terms (No Max) Coefficient 1. 4.69999> 5.19999> Nodes (No Max) 1:5:2 2:6:2 7,8 DOF (Max=6) UX UY UZ UX UY
Holds the independent term information. Defines the Gi, j, Ci, and WTi fields on the RBE3 entry.
x Create Dependent x x Create Independent

Coefficient = Auto Execute Node List Node 7 8 DOFs UX UY UZ 5.2
Apply
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
RROD MPCs This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and RROD is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC .Nastran RROD Bulk Data entry. Define Terms
Dependent Terms (1) Nodes 1
(1)
UY
DOFs (1) Holds the dependent term information. Defines the GB and CMB on the RROD entry. Only one translational DOF may be referenced for this entry.
Independent Terms (1) Nodes (1) 2 Holds the independent term information. Defines the GA field on the RROD entry. The CMA field is left blank.

x Modify x Delete x
DOFs UX UY UZ
Apply
Clear
Cancel
RSPLINE MPCs This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and RSPLINE is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC. Nastran RSPLINE Bulk Data entry. The D/L field for this entry is defined on the main MPC form. This MPC type is typically used to tie together two dissimilar meshes. Define Terms
Dependent Terms (No Max) Sequence 2 4 5 Nodes (1) 2 4 5 DOFs (MAX=6) UX UY U> UX UY U> UX UY U> Holds the dependent term information.
Independent Terms (No Max) Sequence 1 3 6 1 3 6 Nodes (1) Holds the independent term information. Terms with the highest and lowest sequence numbers must be independent.

Sequence = Auto Execute Node List Node 5 DOFs UX UY UZ 5
x Modify x Delete x
Determines what sequence the independent and dependent terms will be written to the RSPLINE entry.
Apply
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
RTRPLT MPCs This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and RTRPLT is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC. Nastran RTRPLT Bulk Data entry. Define Terms
Dependent Terms (Min= 1, Max= 3) Nodes(1) 1 2 3 DOFs (MAX=6) RX RY UX UY UX UY Holds the dependent term information. Defines the GA, GB, GC, CMA, CMB, and CMC fields of the RTRPLT entry.
Independent Terms (Min= 1, Max= 3)) Nodes (1) 1 2 3 DOFs (MAX=6) UX UY UZ RZ UZ UZ Holds the independent term information. The total number of nodes referenced in both the dependent terms and the independent terms must equal three. There must be exactly six independent degrees of freedom, and they must be capable of describing rigid body motion. Defines the GA, GB, GC, CNA, CNB, and CNC fields of the RTRPLT entry.

x Modify x Delete x
DOFs UX UY UZ
Apply
Clear
Cancel
Cyclic Symmetry MPCs The Cyclic Symmetry MPC created by this form will be translated into CYJOIN, CYAX, and CYSYM entries if cyclic symmetric is the selected type, see Solution Parameters (p. 183), or into SPC and MPC entries if the requested type is not explicitly cyclic symmetric. Finite Elements
Action: Object: Type: MPC ID 1 Node Comparison Tolerance 0.005 Create MPC Cyclic Symmetry If the type selected is Cyclic Symmetry, the type of symmetry will always be rotational. NOTE: MPC option will automatically overwrite the analysis coordinate references on all the nodes belonging to the Dependent and Independent Regions. Be careful that this does not erroneously change the meaning of previously applied loads and boundary conditions, or element properties.
Cylindrical Coord. Frame Any node lying on the Z axis will be automatically written to the CYAX entry. Auto Execute Dependent Region Side 2 of the CYJOIN entries. Independent Region Side 1 of the CYJOIN entries. -Apply-
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Sliding Surface MPCs The Sliding Surface MPC created by this form will be translated into explicit MPCs in the NASTRAN input file. Finite Elements
Action: Object: Type: MPC ID 1 Node Comparison Tolerance 0.005 Normal Coord. Frame Option Create MPC Sliding Surface If a Sliding Surface type is used, note that this MPC option will automatically overwrite the analysis coordinate references on all the nodes belonging to the Dependent and Independent Regions. Be careful that this does not erroneously change the meaning of previously applied loads and boundary conditions, or element properties.
x Automatic x User Specified x

Coordinate Frame
Normal Axis
x Axis 1 x Axis 2 x x Axis 3 x

Auto Execute Dependent Region
Independent Region
-Apply-
Superelements
In superelement analysis, the model is partitioned into separate collections of elements. These smaller pieces of structure, called Superelement, are first solved as separate structures by reducing their stiffness matrix, mass matrix, damping matrix, loads and constraints to the boundary nodes and then combined to solve for the whole structure. The first step in creating a superelement is to create a MSC.Patran group (using Group/Create) that contains the elements in the superelement. This group is then selected in the Finite Elements application on the Create/ Superelement form. Finite Elements
Action: Object: Create Superelement
Superelement List Superelement_1 List of existing superelements.
Superelement Name Superelement_1 Superelement Description Left Wing of DC-10
Element Definition Group Group_Superelement_1
The group containing all the elements that define a superelement. Note that the group must contain elements not just nodes. If a group does not contain elements, it will not show up in the Element Definition Group listbox.
Select Boundary Nodes...
Brings up an optional subordinate form that allows a user to select boundary nodes of the superelement. By default, the common nodes between the elements in the group and the rest of the model are selected as the boundary nodes.
-Apply-
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Select Boundary Nodes

Get Default Boundary Nodes
Selecting this option adds the common nodes between the Element Definition Group and the rest of the model to the Selected Boundary Nodes box.
Allows for manual selection of boundary nodes.
Add
Remove
Remove selected nodes from the Selected Boundary Nodes box.
Selected Boundary Nodes
OK
Clear
Add selected nodes to the Selected Boundary Nodes box.
2.6
Material Library
The Materials form will appear when the Material toggle, located on the MSC.Patran application selections, is chosen. The selections made on the Materials menu will determine which material form appears, and ultimately, which MSC .Nastran material will be created. The following pages give an introduction to the Materials form and details of all the material property definitions supported by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference. Only material records that are referenced by an element property region or by a laminate lay-up will be translated. References to externally defined materials will result in special comments in the NASTRAN input file, e.g., materials that property values that are not defined in MSC.Patran. The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran forward translator will perform material type conversions when needed. This applies to both constant material properties and temperature-dependent material properties. For example, a three-dimensional orthotropic material that is referenced by CHEXA elements will be converted into a three-dimensional anisotropic material.
MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Materials Form
This form appears when Materials is selected on the main menu. The Materials form is used to provide options to create the various MSC . Nastran materials. Materials
Action: Object: Method: Create Isotropic Manual Input This toggle defines the basic material directionality and can be set to Isotropic, 2D Orthotropic, 3D Orthotropic, 2D Anisotropic, 3D Anisotropic, or Composite.
* Existing Materials
Filter
Lists the existing materials with the specified directionality.
Material Names Defines the material name. A unique material ID will be assigned during translation. Description DATE: 01-Apr-92 Time: 17:08:02 Describes the material that is being created.
Code: Type:
MSC.Nastran Structural Input Properties...
Indicates the active analysis code and analysis type. These selections are made on the Preferences>Analysis (p. 321) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Change Material Status...
Generates a form that is used to define the material properties.
Generates a form that is used to indicate the active portions of the material model. By default, all portions of a created material model are active.
The following table outlines the options when Create is the selected Action. Object
Isotropic
Option 1 Linear Elastic Nonlinear

Elastic
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
Option 5
Hyperelastic
Nearly
Incompressible
Test Data Coefficients von Mises Tresca Mohr-Coulomb Drucker-Prager
- Mooney Rivlin - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined
1 2 3
Elastoplastic
Stress/Strain
Curve
Hardening Slope
von Mises Tresca Mohr-Coulomb Drucker-Prager
Failure
n/a Hill Hoffman Tsai-Wu Maximum Strain Tabular Input Creep Law 111 Creep Law 112 Creep Law 121 Creep Law 122 Creep Law 211 Creep Law 212 Creep Law 221 Creep Law 222 Creep Law 300
Creep
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Object
2D Orthotropic 3D Orthotropic 2D Anisotropic
Option 1 Linear Elastic Linear Elastic Linear Elastic Elastoplastic
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
Option 5
Stress/Strain
Curve
von Mises Tresca Mohr-Coulomb DruckerPrager
- Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined
Hardening Slope
von Mises Tresca Mohr-Coulomb Drucker-Prager
Failure
n/a Hill Hoffman Tsai-Wu Maximum Strain
Object
Option 1 Creep
Option 2
Tabular Input Creep Law 111 Creep Law 112 Creep Law 121 Creep Law 122 Creep Law 211 Creep Law 212 Creep Law 221 Creep Law 222 Creep Law 300
Option 3
Option 4
Option 5
3D Anisotropic
Linear Elastic Elastoplastic Stress/Strain

Curve
- Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined - Isotropic - Kinematic - Combined
Hardening Slope
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Object
Option 1 Creep
Option 2
Tabular Input Creep Law 111 Creep Law 112 Creep Law 121 Creep Law 122 Creep Law 211 Creep Law 212 Creep Law 221 Creep Law 222 Creep Law 300
Option 3
Option 4
Option 5
Composite
Laminate Rule of Mixtures HAL Cont. Fiber HAL Disc. Fiber HAL Cont. Ribbon Ribbon
HAL Disc. HAL Particulate Short Fiber 1D Short Fiber 2D
Isotropic
Linear Elastic This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form and Isotropic is selected on the Material form and when Linear Elastic is the selected Constitutive Model on the Input Options form. Use this form to define the linear elasticity values and other miscellaneous values for an Isotropic material. The translator will produce MAT1 entry. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Property Name Elastic Modulus = Poissons Ratio = Shear Modulus = Density = Thermal Expansion Coeff = Structural Damping Coeff = Reference Temperature = Linear Elastic Value
Current Constitutive Models:
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Nonlinear Elastic This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form, Isotropic is the selected Object, and Nonlinear Elastic is the selected Constitutive Model on the Input Options form. Use this form to define the nonlinear elastic stress-strain curve on the MATS1 entry. A stress-strain table defined using the Fields application can be selected on this form. Based on this information the translator will produce MATS1 and TABLES1 entries. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Property Name Stress/Strain Curve = Nonlinear Elastic Value
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
Hyperelastic This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form and one of the following is the selected Object. Isotropic
Option 1 Hyperelastic
Option 2 Nearly Incompressible
Option 3 Test Data Coefficients
Option 4 Mooney Rivlin
Option 5 1, 2, 3
Use this form to define the data describing hyperelastic behavior of a material. This data is placed on MATHP and TABLES1 entries. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Comressibility: Data Type: Strain Energy Potential: Order of Polynomial: Property Name Tension/compresion TAB1 = Equibiaxial Tension TAB2 = Simple Shear Data TAB3 = Pure Shear Data TAB4 = Pure Vol. compression TABD = Hyperelastic Nearly Incompressible Test Data Mooney Rivlin 1 Value
OK
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Hyperelastic This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form and one of the following is the selected Object. Isotropic
Option 1 Hyperelastic
Option 2 Nearly Incompressible
Option 3 Test Data Coefficients
Option 4 Mooney Rivlin
Option 5 1, 2, 3
Use this form to define the data describing hyperelastic behavior of a material. This data is placed on MATHP. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Comressibility: Data Type: Strain Energy Potential: Order of Polynomial: Property Name Distortional Def. Coef. A10 = Distorional Def. Coef. A01 = Vol. Deformation Coef. D1= Density RHO= Vol. Thermal Exp. Coef. AV = Reference Temp. TREF = Structural Damp. Coeff GE = Hyperelastic Nearly Incompressible Coefficients Mooney Rivlin 1 Value
OK
Clear
Cancel
Elastoplastic This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form and one of the following is the selected Object. Isotropic 2D Anisotropic 3D Anisotropic
Option 1 Elastoplastic
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4 Isotropic, Kinematic, Combined Isotropic, Kinematic, Combined
Stress/Strain Curve von Mises Tresca
Use this form to define the data describing plastic behavior of a material. This data is placed on MATS1 and TABLES1 entries. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Nonlinear Data Input: Yield Function: Hardening Rule: Property Name Stress/Strain Curve = Elastoplastic Stress/Strain Curve Von Mises Isotropic Value
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Elastoplastic This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form when one of the following is the selected Object. Isotropic 2D Anisotropic 3D Anisotropic
Option 2 Stress/Strain Curve
Option 3 Mohr-Coulomb Drucker-Prager
Use this form to define the data describing the plastic behavior of a material. This data is placed on MATS1 and TABLES1 entries. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Nonlinear Data Input: Yield Function: Hardening Rule: Property Name Stress/Strain Curve = Internal Friction Angle = Elastoplastic Stress/Strain Curve Mohr-Coulomb Isotropic Value
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
Elastoplastic This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form and one of the following is the selected Object. Isotropic Isotropic 2D Anisotropic
Option 2 Hardening Slope
Option 3 von Mises Tresca
Use this form to define the data describing the plastic behavior of a material. This data is placed on an MATS1 entries. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Nonlinear Data Input: Yield Function: Hardening Rule: Property Name Hardening Slope = Yield Point = Elastoplastic Hardening Slope Von Mises Isotropic Value
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Elastoplastic This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form and one of the following is the selected Object. Isotropic 2D Anisotropic 3D Anisotropic
Option 2 Hardening Slope
Option 3 Mohr-Coulomb Drucker-Prager
Use this form to define the data describing the plastic behavior of a material. This data is placed on an MATS1 entries. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Nonlinear Data Input: Yield Function: Hardening Rule: Property Name Hardening Slope = Yield Point = Internal Friction Angle = Elastoplastic Hardening Slope Mohr-Coulomb Isotropic Value
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
Failure This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form and one of the following is the selected Object. Isotropic 2D Anisotropic
Option 1 Failure
Option 2 n/a
Use this form to define the failure criteria for the isotropic and two-dimensional anisotropic material. This data appears in the ST, SC, and SS fields on MAT1 and MAT2 entries. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Composite Failure Theory: Property Name Tension Stress Limit = Compression Stress Limit = Shear Stress Limit = Failure n/a Value
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Failure This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form and one of the following is the selected Object. Isotropic 2D Anisotropic
Option 1 Failure
Option 2 Hill, Hoffman, Tsai-Wu, Maximum Strain
Use this form to define the failure criteria of the isotropic and two-dimensional anisotropic material. This data appears on MAT1 and PCOMP entries. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Composite Failure Theory: Property Name Tension Stress Limit = Compression Stress Limit = Shear Stress Limit = Bonding Shear Stress Limit = Failure Hill Value
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
Creep This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form and one of the following is the selected Object. Isotropic 2D Anisotropic 3D Anisotropic
Option 1 Creep
Option 2 Tabular
Use this form to define the primary stiffness, primary damping, and secondary damping for a creep model with tabular input. This data appears on the CREEP entry. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Creep Data Input: Property Name Creep Reference Temp = Creep Threshold Factor = Temp. Dependence Exponent = Primary Creep Stiffness = Primary Creep Damping = Secondary Creep Damping = Creep Tabular Input Value
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Creep This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form and one of the following is the selected Object. Isotropic 2D Anisotropic 3D Anisotropic
Option 1 Creep
Option 2 Creep Law 111, 112,121,122, 211, 212, 221, 222, 300
Use this form to define the coefficients for one of many empirical creep models available in MSC . Nastran. This data appears on the CREEP entry. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Creep Data Input: Property Name Creep Reference Temp. = Creep Threshold Factor = Temp. Dependence Exponent Coefficient A = Coefficient B = Coefficient C = Coefficient D = Coefficient E = Coefficient F = Coefficient G = Creep Creep Law 111 Value
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
2D Orthotropic
Linear Elastic This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form, 2D Orthotropic is the selected Object, and Linear Elastic is the selected Constitutive Model on the Input Options form. Use this form to define the elasticity properties, and other miscellaneous data for a two dimensional Orthotropic material. The data appears on MAT8 entries. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Property Name Elastic Modulus 11 = Elastic Modulus 22 = Poissons Ratio 12 = Shear Modulus 12 = Shear Modulus 23 = Shear Modulus 13 = Density = Thermal Expansion Coef 11= Thermal Expansion Coef 22 = Structural Damping Coef = Reference Temperature = Linear Elastic Value
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Failure This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form and 2D Orthotropic is the selected Object. Option 1 Failure Option 2 Stress Strain Option 3 n/a n/a
Use this form to define the failure criteria for a 2D Orthotropic material. The data appears in the Xt, Xc, Yt, Yc, and S fields of the MAT8 entry. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Failure Limits: Composite Failure Theory: Property Name Tension Stress Limit 11 = Tension Stress Limit 22 = Compress Stress Limit 11 = Compress Stress Limit 22 = Shear Stress Limit = Failure Stress n/a Value
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
Failure This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form and 2D Orthotropic is the selected Object. Option 1 Failure Option 2 Stress Strain Option 3 Hill, Hoffman Hill, Hoffman
Use this form to define the failure criteria of a two-dimensional orthotropic material. This data appears on MAT8 and PCOMP entries. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Failure Limits: Composite Failure Theory: Property Name Tension Stress Limit 11 = Tension Stress Limit 22 = Compress Stress Limit 11 = Compress Stress Limit 22 = Shear Stress Limit = Bonding Shear Stress Limit = Failure Stress Hill Value
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Failure This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form and 2D Orthotropic is the selected Object. Option 1 Failure Option 2 Stress Strain Option 3 Tsai-Wu, Maximum Strain Tsai-Wu, Maximum Strain
Use this form to define the failure criteria of a two-dimensional orthotropic material. This data appears on MAT8 and PCOMP entries. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Failure Limits: Composite Failure Theory: Property Name Tension Stress Limit 11 = Tension Stress Limit 22 = Compress Stress Limit 11 = Compress Stress Limit 22 = Shear Stress Limit = Interaction Term = Bonding Shear Stress Limit = Failure Stress Tsai-Wu Value
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
3D Orthotropic
Linear Elastic This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form, 3D Orthotropic is the selected Object, and Linear Elastic is the selected Constitutive Model on the Input Options form. Use this form to define the elasticity properties and other miscellaneous data for a 3D Orthotropic material. This data appears on MAT3 entries if the material is used with axisymmetric solid elements or MAT9 entries if the material is used with 3D solid element (CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA) entries. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Property Name Elastic Modulus 11 = Elastic Modulus 22 = Elastic Modulus 33 = Poisson Ratio 12 = Poisson Ratio 23 = Poisson Ratio 31 = Shear Modulus 12 = Shear Modulus 23 = Shear Modulus 31 = Density = Thermal Expansion Coeff 11= Thermal Expansion Coeff 22= Thermal Expansion Coeff 33= Linear Elastic Value
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
2D Anisotropic
Linear Elastic This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form, 2D Anisotropic is the selected Object, and Linear Elastic is the selected Constitutive Model on the Input Options form. Use this form to define the elasticity properties and other miscellaneous data for a 2D plane stress Anisotropic material. This data appears on MAT2 entries. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Property Name Stiffness 11 = Stiffness 12 = Stiffness 13 = Stiffness 22 = Stiffness 23 = Stiffness 33 = Density = Thermal Expansion Coef 11= Thermal Expansion Coef 22 = Thermal Expansion Coef 12 = Structural Damping Coef = Reference Temperature = Linear Elastic Value
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
3D Anisotropic
Linear Elastic This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form, 3D Anisotropic is the selected Object, and Linear Elastic is the selected Constitutive Model on the Input Options form. Use this form to define the elasticity properties and other miscellaneous data for a 3D Anisotropic material. This data appears on MAT9 entries. Input Options
Constitutive Model: Property Name Stiffness 11 = Stiffness 12 = Stiffness 13 = Stiffness 14 = Stiffness 15 = Stiffness 16 = Stiffness 22 = Stiffness 23 = Stiffness 24 = Stiffness 25 = Stiffness 26 = Stiffness 33 = Stiffness 34 = Linear Elastic Value
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Composite
The Composite forms provide alternate ways of defining the linear elastic properties of materials. All the composite options, except for Laminated Composite, will always result in a homogeneous elastic material in MSC.Nastran. When the Laminated Composite option is used to create a material and this material is then referenced in a Revised or Standard Laminate Plate element property region, a PCOMP entry is created. However, if this material is referenced by a different type of element property region, for example, Revised or Standard Homogeneous Plate, then the equivalent homogeneous material properties are used instead of the laminate lay-up data. Only materials created through the Laminated Composite option should be referenced by a Revised or Standard Laminate Plate element property region. Refer to Composite Materials Construction (p. 72) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.
Laminated
This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form, Composite is the selected Object, and Laminate is the selected Method. Use this form to define the laminate lay-up data for a composite material. If the resulting material is referenced in a Revised or Standard Laminate Plate element property region, then an MSC . Nastran PCOMP entry containing the lay-up data is written. If the resulting material is referenced by any other type of element property region, the equivalent homogeneous properties of the material are used. Laminated Composite
Stacking Sequence Convention Total Stacking Sequence Definition: Select an Existing Material. Material Name Thickness Orientation Offset
Insert Material Names
Text Entry Mode Insert
Delete Selected Rows
x Material Names x Thicknesses x x Orientations x

Load Text Into Spreadsheet Show Laminate Properties... Clear Text and Data Boxes
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
2.7
Element Properties
The Element Properties form appears when the Element Properties toggle, located on the MSC.Patran main form, is chosen.There are several option menus available when creating element properties. The selections made on the Element Properties menu will determine which element property form appears, and ultimately, which MSC .Nastran element will be created. The following pages give an introduction to the Element Properties form, and details of all the element property definitions supported by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference.
MSC.Patran
Element Properties Form

This form appears when Element Properties is selected on the main menu. There are four option menus on this form. Each will determine which MSC. Nastran element type will be created and which property forms will appear. The individual property forms are documented later in this section. For a full description of this form, see Element Properties Forms (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments. Element Properties
Action: Dimension: Type: Create 2D Shell Use this option menu to define the elements dimension. The options are: 0D (point elements) 1D (bar elements) 2D (tri and quad elements) 3D (tet, wedge, and hex elements)
Existing Property Sets
This option menu depends on the selection made in the Dimension option menu. Use this menu to define the general type of element, such as: Property Set Name Mass Versus Grounded Spring Shell Versus 2D_Solid
Option (s): Homogeneous Standard Formulation Input Properties... These option menus may or may not be presented, and their contents depend heavily on the selections made in Dimension and Type. See Table 2-1 for more help.
Application Region Select Members
Add Application Region
Remove
Apply
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
The following table outlines the option menus when Analysis Type is set to Structural. Table 2-1 Structural Options Dimension 0D Mass Type Option 1 Coupled Grounded Lumped Grounded Spring Grounded Damper Grounded Bush 1D Beam General Section Curved w/General Section Curved w/Pipe Section Lumped Section Tapered Section Rod Spring Damper Gap 1D Mass PLOTEL Scalar Bush 2D Shell Homogeneous Standard Revised P-element Laminate Equivalent Section Standard Revised Standard Revised P-element Scalar Viscous General Section Pipe Section Standard P-element Standard CONROD Standard Option 2
Table 2-1 Structural Options Dimension 2D (continued) Type Bending Panel Revised P-element 2D-Solid Axisymmetric Plane Strain Standard Revised P-Formulation Hyperelastic Formulation Membrane Shear Panel 3D Solid Standard P-Formulation Hyperelastic Formulation Standard Revised Option 1 Standard Option 2
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Coupled Point Mass (CONM1)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 0D Type Mass Option(s) Coupled Topologies Point/1
Use this form to create a CONM1 element. This defines a 6 x 6 symmetric mass matrix at a geometric point of the structural model. Input Properties
Coupled Point Mass (CONM1) Property Name Mass Orientation Mass Component 1,1 Mass Component 2,1 Mass Component 2,2 Mass Component 3,1 Mass Component 3,2 Value Value Type CID Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar Defines the orientation of the 1-2-3 axes of the mass matrix. The value is a reference to an existing coordinate frame. The 1-2-3 axes will be aligned with the X-Y-Z axes of the specified coordinate system. If a non rectangular coordinate system is specified, the system will be evaluated into a local rectangular system, which is then used to orient the mass matrix. This property is the CID field on the CONM1 entry. This property is optional.
OK
Defines the values of the mass matrix. These properties are the Mij fields on the CONM1 entry and can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. Each of these properties are optional; however, at least one must be defined.
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CONM1 element that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Mass Component 3,3 Mass Component 4,1 Mass Component 4,2 Mass Component 4,4 Mass Component 5,1 Mass Component 5,2 Mass Component 5,3 Mass Component 5,4 Mass Component 5,5 Mass Component 6,1 Mass Component 6,2 Mass Component 6,3 Mass Component 6,4 Mass Component 6,5 Mass Component 6,6 Description Defines the values of the mass matrix. These are the Mij fields on the CONM1 entry. These properties can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. Each of these properties are optional; however, at least one must be defined.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Grounded Scalar Mass (CMASS1)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension Type 0D Mass Option(s) Grounded Topologies Point/1
Use this form to create a CMASS1 element and a PMASS property. This defines a scalar mass element of the structural model. Only one node is used in this method, and the other node is defined to be grounded. Input Properties
Grounded Scalar Mass (CMASS1) Property Name Mass Dof at Node 1 Value Value Type Real Scalar String Defines the translation mass or rotational inertia value to be applied. This is the M field on the PMASS entry. This property can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.
Defines which degree of freedom this value will be attached to. This property can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ and defines the setting for the C1 field on the CMASS1 entry. This property is required.
OK
Lumped Point Mass (CONM2)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension Type 0D Mass Option(s) Lumped Topologies Point/1
Use this form to create a CONM2 element. This defines a concentrated mass at a geometric point of the structural model.
Defines an offset from the specified node to where the lumped mass actually is to exist in the structural mode. This vector is defined in the Mass Orientation coordinate system. Defines the X1, X2, and X3 fields on the CONM2 entry. This property is optional.
Input Properties
Lumped Point Mass (CONM2) Property Name Mass [Mass Orient. CID/CG] [Mass Offset] [Inertia 1,1] [Inertia 2,1] [Inertia 2,2] Value Value Type Real Scalar CID Vector Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar Defines the translational mass value to be used. This is the M field on the CONM2 entry. This property can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required. Defines the orientation of the 1-2-3 axes of the mass matrix. This is a reference to an existing coordinate frame. The 1-2-3 axes will be aligned with the X-Y-Z axes of the specified coordinate system. If a nonrectangular coordinate system is specified, the system will be evaluated into a local rectangular system, which is then used to orient the mass matrix. This is the CID field on the CONM2 entry. If the Value Type is set to Vector then the components of the vector define the center of gravity of the mass in the basic coordinate system and the field for CID is translated as -1. This property is optional.
OK
Inertia i,j defines the rotation inertia properties of this lumped mass. These properties are the Iij fields on the CONM2 record. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These values are optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CONM2 element that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Inertia 3,1 Inertia 3,2 Inertia 3,3 Description Inertia i,j defines the rotation inertia properties of this lumped mass. These are the Iij fields on the CONM2 entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These values are optional.
Grounded Scalar Spring (CELAS1)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form when the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension Type 0D Grounded Spring Option(s) Topologies Point/1
Use this form to create a CELAS1 element and a PELAS property. This defines a scalar spring element of the structural model. Only one node is used in this method. The other node is defined to be grounded.
Defines the coefficient to be used for this spring. This is the K field on the PELAS entry. This can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.
Input Properties
Grounded Scalar Spring (CELAS1) Property Name Spring Constant [Damping Coefficient] [Stress Coefficient] Dof at Node 1 Value Value Type Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar String Defines the relationship between the spring deflection and the stresses within the spring. This property is the S field on the PELAS entry and can either be a real value, or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines what damping is to be included. This is the GE field on the PELAS entry. This property can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
OK
Defines which degree of freedom this value is to be attached to. This can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ. This property defines the setting of the C1 field on the CELAS1 entry. This property is required.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Grounded Scalar Damper (CDAMP1)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form when the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension Type 0D Grounded Damper Option(s) Topologies Point/1
Use this form to create a CDAMP1 element and a PDAMP property. This defines a scalar damper element of the structural model. Only one node is used in this method. The other node is defined to be grounded. Input Properties
Grounded Scalar Damper (CDAMP1) Property Name Value Value Type Defines the force per unit velocity value to be used. This property is the B field on the PDAMP entry and can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
[Damping Coefficient] Dof at Node 1
Real Scalar String
Defines which degree of freedom this value is to be attached to. This property can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RY, or RZ and defines the setting for the C1 field on the CDAMP1 entry. This property is required.
OK
Bush
This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 1D Type Bush Option(s) Topologies Bar/2
Input Properties
Bush Joint Property Name [Bush Orientation] [Offset Location] [Offset Orientation Sys] [Offset Orientation Vec] [Spring Constant 1] [Spring constant 2] Value Value Type Vector Real Scalar CID Vector Real Scalar Real Scalar This toggle can also be set to Node Id or CID.
Field Definitions
OK
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Bush Orientation System Description CID specifies the Grounded Bush Orientation System. The element X,Y, and Z axes are aligned with the coordinate system principal axes. If the CID is for a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system, the grid point specified locates the system. If CID = 0, the basic coordinate system is used. Defines the stiffness associated with a particular degree of freedom. This property is defined in terms of force per unit displacement and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition for defining stiffness vs. frequency.
Spring Constant 1 Spring Constant 2 Spring Constant 3 Spring Constant 4 Spring Constant 5 Spring Constant 6 Stiff. Freq Depend 1 Stiff. Freq Depend 2 Stiff. Freq Depend 3 Stiff. Freq Depend 4 Stiff. Freq Depend 5 Stiff. Freq Depend 6 Stiff. Force/Disp 1 Stiff. Force/Disp 2 Stiff. Force/Disp 3 Stiff. Force/Disp 4 Stiff. Force/Disp 5 Stiff. Force/Disp 6 Damping Coefficient 1 Damping Coefficient 2 Damping Coefficient 3 Damping Coefficient 4 Damping Coefficient 5 Damping Coefficient 6 Damp. Freq Depend 1 Damp. Freq Depend 2 Damp. Freq Depend 3 Damp. Freq Depend 4 Damp. Freq Depend 5 Damp. Freq Depend 6 Structural Damping Struc. Damp Freq Depend
Defines the nonlinear force/displacement curves for each degree of freedom of the spring-damper system.
Defines the force per velocity damping value for each degree of freedom. This property can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency
Defines the non-dimensional structural damping coefficient (GE1). This property can be either a real value, or a reference to an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency.
Prop Name Stress Recovery Translation Stress Recovery Rotation Strain Recovery Translation Strain Recovery Rotation
Description Stress recovery coefficients. The element stress are computed by multiplying the stress coefficients with the recovered element forces. Strain Recovery Coefficients. The element strains are computed by multiplying the strain coefficients with the recovered element strains.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
General Section Beam (CBAR)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension Type 1D Beam Option(s) General Section Topologies Bar/2
Use this form to create a CBAR element and a PBAR or PBARL property. A CBARAO entry will be generated if any Station Distances are specified. This defines a simple beam element in the structural model.
Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane, where the x-axis is along the beam. The orientation vector can be defined as either a vector or a reference to an existing node in the XY plane. This orientation defines the value for the X1, X2, X3, or G0 fields on the CBAR entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
General Section Beam (CBAR) Property Name Value Material Name [Section Name] Bar Orientation [Offset @ Node 1] [Offset @ Node 2] [Pinned DOFs @ Node 1] [Pinned DOFs @ Node 1] na: Value Type Mat Prop Name Properties Vector Vector Vector String String
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the value to be used in the MID field on the PBAR entry. This property is required. Allows a beam section previously created using the beam library to be selected. When a beam section is chosen and the Associate Beam Section option is toggled, the cross sectional properties need not be input on this Input Properties form. Allows a user to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions (PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If Dimensions is choosen, the MSC.Nastrans built-in section library (Version 69 and later), PBARL/PBEAML, will be used to define the bar/beam. If Properties is chosen, the standard bar/beam properties, PBAR/PBEAM will be used to define the beam section. If the Dimensions Option is set to Dimensions, the Translation Parameters Version must be set to version 69 or later. Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBAR entry. On the CBAR entry, these values are always in the displacement coordinate system of the node. In MSC.Patran, they are either global, or in a system specified such as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These properties are optional. Activates the Beam Library forms. These forms will allow the user to define beam properties by choosing a standard cross section type and inputing dimensions.
Material Property Sets
Create Sections Beam Library

Associate Beam Section OK
If the Section Name Value Type is set to Properties, you can use this toggle to choose between defining the section properties manually (i.e., specifying the A, I11, I22, etc.) or by using the beam library to define the section. If the Section Name Value Type is set to Dimensions, this will be toggled ON automatically and will not be user selectable. The toggle does NOT affect the creation of a PBAR vs. PBARL or a PBEAM vs. PBEAML. The graphical display of the bar/beam section can be displayed/controlled using the Display/Load/BC/Elem Properties Menu.
These degrees of freedom are in the element local coordinate system. Values that can be specified are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or any combination. These properties are used to remove connections between the node and selected degrees of freedom at the two ends of the beam. This option is commonly used to create a pin connection by specifying RX, RY, and RZ to be released. Defines the setting of the PA and PB fields on the CBAR record. These properties are optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBAR element and a PBAR or PBARL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Area Description Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on the PBAR entry. This value can be either real values or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required. Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These are the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBAR entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These values are optional. Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the PBAR entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBAR entry. These values can be either real value or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional. Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This is the NSM field on the PBAR entry. This value can be either a real value or reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Indicates the stress recovery. They define the Y and Z coordinates of the stress recovery points across the section of the beam, as defined in the local element coordinate system. These are the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBAR entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Inertia 1,1 Inertia 2,2 Inertia 2,1 Torsional Constant
Shear Stiff, Y Shear Stiff, Z Nonstructural Mass
Y of Point C Z of Point C X of Point D Y of Point D X of Point E Y of Point E X of Point F Y of Point F Station Distances
Defines up to 6 points along each bar element. Values specified are fractions of the beam length. Therefore, these values are in the range of 0. to 1. This defines the X1 and X6 fields on the CBARAO entry. The SCALE field on the CBARAO entry is always set to FR. The alternate format for the CBARAO entry is not supported. These values are real values. These properties are optional.
P-Formulation General Beam (CBEAM)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension Type 1D Beam Option(s) General Section P-Formulation Topologies Bar/2, Bar/3 Bar/4
Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML property. This form defines a simple beam element in the structural model for an adaptive, p-element analysis.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane, where the x-axis is along the beam, and this orientation vector, which can be defined as either a vector or a reference to an existing node, is in the XY plane. This defines the value for the X1, X2, X3, or G0 fields on the CBAR entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
P-Formulation General Beam (CBEAM) Property Name Value Material Name [Section Name] Bar Orientation [Offset @ Node 1] [Offset @ Node 2] [Pinned DOFs @ Node 1] [Pinned DOFs @ Node 1] na: Value Type Mat Prop Name Properties Vector Vector Vector String String
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the value to be used in the MID field on the PBAR entry. This property is required. Allows a beam section previously created using the beam library to be selected. When a beam section is chosen and the Associate Beam Section option is toggled, the cross sectional properties need not be input on this Input Properties form. Allows a user to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions (PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If Dimensions is choosen, the MSC.Nastrans built-in section library (Version 69 and later), PBARL/PBEAML, will be used to define the bar/beam. If Properties is chosen, the standard bar/beam properties, PBAR/PBEAM will be used to define the beam section. If the Dimensions Option is set to Dimensions, the Translation Parameters Version must be set to version 69 or later. Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry. On the CBEAM entry, these values are always in the displacement coordinate system of the node. In MSC.Patran, they are either global, or in a system specified such as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These properties are optional.

If the Section Name Value Type is set to Properties, you can use this toggle to choose between defining the section properties manually (i.e., specifying the A, I11, I22, etc.) or by using the beam library to define the section. If the Section Name Value Type is set to Dimensions, this will be toggled ON automatically and will not be user selectable. The toggle does NOT affect the creation of a PBAR vs. PBARL or a PBEAM vs. PBEAML. The graphical display of the bar/beam section can be displayed/controlled using the Display/Load/BC/Elem Properties Menu.
Activates the Beam Library forms. These forms will allow the user to define beam properties by choosing a standard cross section type and inputting dimensions.
These degrees of freedom are in the element local coordinate system. The values that can be specified are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or any combination. These properties are used to remove connections between the node and select degrees of freedom at the two ends of the beam. This option is commonly used to create a pin connection by specifying RX, RY, and RZ to be released. It also defines the setting of the PA and PB fields on the CBAR entry. These properties are optional.
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Area Description Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on the PBEAM entry. This value can be either real values or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required. Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These are the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These values are optional. Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the PBEAM entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional. Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This value can be either a real value or reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Indicates the stress recovery. Define the Y and Z coordinates of the stress recovery points across the section of the beam as defined in the local element coordinate system. These are the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Inertia 1,1 Inertia 2,2 Inertia 2,1 Torsional Constant
Shear Stiff, Y Shear Stiff, Z Nonstructural Mass
Y of Point C Z of Point C X of Point D Y of Point D X of Point E Y of Point E X of Point F Y of Point F Station Distances
Defines up to 6 points along each bar element. Values specified are fractions of the beam length. Therefore, these values are in the range of 0. to 1. This defines the X1 and X6 fields on the CBARAO entry. The SCALE field on the CBARAO entry is always set to FR. The alternate format for the CBARAO records is not supported. These values are real values. These properties are optional. Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements. Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry.
Starting P-orders and Maximum P-orders
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Prop Name P-order Coord. System
Description The two sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry.
Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error analysis. This is the ERREST field in the ADAPT entry. P-order Adaptivity Error Tolerance Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry. The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default, equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Curved General Section Beam (CBEND)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension Type 1D Beam Option(s) Curved w/General Section Topologies Bar/2
Use this form to create a CBEND element and a PBEND property. This form defines a curved beam element of the structural model. The CBEND element has several ways to define the radius of the bend and the orientation of that curvature.This element in MSC.Patran always uses the method of defining the center of curvature point (GEOM=1). An alternate property of the Curved Pipe element also exists. Input Properties
Curved General Sec. Beam (CBEND) Property Name Material Name Center of Curvature [Radial Bar Offset] [Axial Bar Offset] Area Value Value Type Mat Prop Name Vector Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam cross section. These properties define the settings of the RC and ZC fields on the PBEND entry. These values can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional. Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PBEND entry.This property is required.
OK
Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This property is the A field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Defines the center of curvature of the pipe bend. It is done by either specifying a vector from the first node of the element or by referencing a node. The CBEND element in MSC.Nastran has several ways to define the radius of the pipe bend and the orientation of that curvature. This defines the settings of the X1, X2, X3, and G0 fields of the CBEND entry. This property is required.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEND element and a PBEND property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Inertia 1,1 Inertia 2,2 Description Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These properties are the I1 and I2 fields on the PBEND entry. These values can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. These values are optional. Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value, or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBEND entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional. Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam and is the NSM field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the radial offset of the geometric centroid from the end nodes. Positive values move the centroid of the section towards the center of curvature of the pipe bend. This property is the DELTAN field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. These properties are for stress recovery. They define the R and Z coordinates of the stress recovery points across the section of the beam, as defined in the local element coordinate system. These properties are the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 and F2 fields on the PBEND entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Torsional Constant
Shear Stiff, R Shear Stiff, Z Nonstructural Mass
Radial NA Offset
R of Point C Z of Point C R of Point D Z of Point D R of Point E Z of Point E R of Point F Z of Point F
Curved Pipe Section Beam (CBEND)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 1D Type Beam Option(s) Curved W/Pipe Section Topologies Bar/2
Use this form to create a CBEND element and a PBEND property. This defines a curved pipe or elbow element of the structural model. The internal pressure is defined as part of the element definition because, for pipe elbows, the internal pressure affects the element stiffness.
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. Defines the MID field on the PBEND entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
Curved Pipe Section Beam (CBEND) Property Name Material Name Center of Curvature [Radial Bar Offset] [Axial Bar Offset] Mean Pipe Radius Pipe Thickness Value Value Type Mat Prop Name Vector Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar Defines the center of curvature of the pipe bend. This can be done either by specifying a vector from the first node of the element or by referencing a node. The CBEND element in MSC.Nastran has several ways to define the radius of the pipe bend and the orientation of that curvature. Defines the settings of the X1, X2, X3, and G0 fields on the CBEND entry. This element in MSC.Patran always uses the method of defining the center of curvature point (GEOM=1). This value is required.
Indicates the wall thickness of the pipe. This is the t field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required. OK
Indicates the distance from the centroid of the pipe cross section to mid-wall location. This is the r field on the PBEND entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required. Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the pipe cross section. These are the RC and ZC fields on the PBEND entry. These values can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEND element and a PBEND property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Internal Pipe Pressure Description Indicates the static pressure inside the pipe elbow. This is the P field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam and is the NSM field on the PBEND entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Indicates the desired type of stress intensification to be used. This is a character string value. This property is the FSI field on the PBEND entry. Valid settings of this parameter are General, ASME, and Welding Council.
Nonstructural Mass
Stress Intensification
Lumped Area Beam (CBEAM/PBCOMP)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 1D Type Beam Option(s) Lumped Section Topologies Bar/2
Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBCOMP property. This defines a beam element of constant cross section, using a lumped area element formulation.
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is required. Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any crosssectional properties. This orientation defines the local XY plane, where the X-axis is along the beam, and this orientation vector is in the XY plane. This orientation vector can be defined either as a vector or as a reference to an existing node and defines the setting of the X1, X2, X3, and G0 fields on the CBEAM entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
Lumped Area Beam (CBEAM/PBCOMP) Property Name Material Name Bar Orientation [Offset @ Node 1] [Offset @ Node 2] [Pinned DOFs @ Node 1] [Pinned DOFs @ Node 2] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name Vector Vector Vector String String
OK
Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry. On the CBEAM entry, these values are always in the displacement coordinate system of the node. In MSC.Patran, they are either global, or in a system specified such as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These properties are optional.
Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to be released. By default, all degrees of freedom can transfer forces at the ends of beams. By releasing specified degrees of freedom, pin or sliding type connections can be created. These degrees-of-freedom are in the element local coordinate system. The values that can be specified here are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or a combination. These properties define the settings of the PA and PB fields on the CBEAM entry and are optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEND element and a PBCOMP property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Warp DOF @ Node 1 Warp DOF @ Node 2 Description Defines a node ID where the warping degree-of-freedom constraints and results will be placed. These must reference existing nodes within the model. They are the SA and SB fields on the CBEAM entry. These properties are optional. Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on the PBCOMP entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This is the NSM field on the PBCOMP record. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBCOMP entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the location of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in the beam cross-section coordinate system. These properties are the M1 and M2 fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Specifies which type of symmetry is being used to define the lumped areas of the beam cross section. This is a character string parameter. The valid settings are No Symmetry, YZ Symmetry, Y Symmetry, Z Symmetry, or Y=Z Symmetry. This defines the setting of the SECTION field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is optional. Defines the locations of the various lumped areas. These are defined in the cross-sectional coordinate system. These properties define the Yi and Zi fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values are lists of real values. These properties are optional. Defines the Fraction of the total area to be included in this lumped area. The sum of all area factors for a given section must equal 1.0. If the data provided does not meet this requirement, the values will all be scaled to the corrected value. These properties define the values for the Ci fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values are lists of real values. These properties are optional.
Area
Nonstructural Mass
Shear Stiff, Y Shear Stiff, Z Y of NSM Z of NSM
Symmetry Option
Ys of Lumped Areas Zs of Lumped Areas
Area Factors
Tapered Beam (CBEAM)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 1D Type Beam Option(s) Tapered Topologies Bar/2
Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML property. This defines a beam element with varying cross sections.
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PBEAM entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
Tapered Beam ( CBEAM ) Property Name Value Material Name [Section Name] Bar Orientation [Offset @ Node 1] [Offset @ Node 2] [Pinned DOFs @ Node 1] [Pinned DOFs @ Node 1] na: Value Type Mat Prop Name Section Name Vector Vector Vector String String
This databox allows a beam section previously created using the beam library to be selected. When a beam section is chosen and the Use Beam Section option is toggled, the cross sectional properties need not be input on this Input Properties form. Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry. On the CBEAM entry, these values are always in the displacement coordinate system of the node. In MSC.Patran, they are either global, or in a system specified such as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These properties are optional. Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to be released. By default, all degrees of freedom can transfer forces at the ends of beams. Pin or sliding type connections can be created by releasing specified degrees of freedom. These degrees of freedom are in the element local coordinate system. The values specified here are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or a combination. These properties define the settings of the PA and PB fields on the CBEAM entry. These properties are optional. Selecting this icon will activate the Beam Library forms. These forms will allow the user to define beam properties by choosing a standard cross section type and inputting dimensions.

Use Beam Section OK
Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane, where the X-axis is along the beam, and this orientation vector is in the XY plane. This orientation vector can be defined either as a vector or as a reference to an existing node. This orientation defines the setting of the X1, X2, X3, and G0 fields on the CBEAM entry. This property is required.
If the Use Beam Section toggle is ON, a PBEAML entry is created. This entry is only supported in MSC. Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC.Nastran Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML property element that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Warp DOF @ Node 1 Warp DOF @ Node 2 Description Defines a node ID where the warping degree of freedom constraints and results will be placed. These must reference existing nodes within the model. These are the SA and SB fields on the CBEAM entry. These properties are optional. Defines stations along each beam element where the section properties will be defined. The values specified here are fractions of the beam length. These values, therefore, are in the range of 0. to 1. These values define the settings of the X/XB fields on the PBEAM record. These values are real values. These properties are optional. Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This property defines the settings of the A fields on the PBEAM record. This value can be either a real value, or reference to an existing field definition. This property is required. Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These defines the settings of the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values are real values. These properties are optional. Defines the torsional stiffness parameters. This property defines the J fields on the PBEAM entry. This is a list of real values, one for each station location. This property is optional. Defines the Y and Z locations in element coordinates, relative to the shear center for stress data recovery. These define the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These are lists of real values, one for each station location. These properties are optional.
Station Distances
Cross-Sect. Areas
Inertias 1,1 Inertias 2,2 Inertias 1,2 Torsional Constants
Ys of C Points Zs of C Points Ys of D points Zs of D Points Ys of E Points Zs of E Points Ys of F Points Zs of F Points Nonstructural Masses
Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This property is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This is a list of real values, one for each station location. This property is optional. Specified the nonstructural mass moments of inertia per unit length about the nonstructural mass center of gravity at each end of the element. These properties are the NSI(A) and NSI(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
NSM Inertia @ Node 1 NSM Inertia @ Node 2
Prop Name Y of NSM @ Node 1 Z of NSM @ Node 1 Y of NSM @ Node 2 Z of NSM @ Node 2 Shear Stiff, Y Shear Stiff, Z Shear Relief Y Shear Relief Z
Description Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the location of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in the beam cross-section coordinate system. These are the M1(A), M2(A), M1(B), and M2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Defines the shear relief coefficients due to taper. These are the S1 and S2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Specifies the warping coefficient at each end of the element. These properties are the CW(A) and CW(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the location of the neutral axis. These values are measured in the beam cross section coordinate system and are the N1(A), N2(A), N1(B), and N2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Warp Coeff. @ Node 1 Warp Coeff. @ Node 2
Y of NA @ Node 1 Z of NA @ Node 1 Y of NA @ Node 2 Z of NA @ Node 2
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
General Section (CBEAM)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 1D Type Beam Option(s) General Section (CBEAM)
This set of options provides a method of creating beam models with warping due to torsion. The capabilities of this beam properties formulation option are similar to those of the Tapered Section formulation, except that warping due to torsion is handled more conveniently.
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PBEAM entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
General Section( CBEAM ) Property Name Value Material Name [Section Name] Bar Orientation [Offset @ Node 1] [Offset @ Node 2] [Pinned DOFs @ Node 1] [Pinned DOFs @ Node 1] na: Value Type Mat Prop Name Properties Vector Vector Vector String String
This databox allows a beam section previously created using the beam library to be selected. When a beam section is chosen and the Use Beam Section option is toggled, the cross sectional properties need not be input on this Input Properties form. Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual shear centers of the beam cross section. These offsets are defined as vectors. These properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry. On the CBEAM entry, these values are always in the displacement coordinate system of the node. In MSC.Patran, they are either global, or in a system specified such as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These properties are optional. Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to be released. By default, all degrees of freedom can transfer forces at the ends of beams. Pin or sliding type connections can be created by releasing specified degrees of freedom. These degrees of freedom are in the element local coordinate system. The values specified here are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or a combination. These properties define the settings of the PA and PB fields on the CBEAM entry. These properties are optional. Selecting this icon will activate the Beam Library forms. These forms will allow the user to define beam properties by choosing a standard cross section type and inputting dimensions.

Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane, where the X-axis is along the beam, and this orientation vector is in the XY plane. This orientation vector can be defined either as a vector or as a reference to an existing node. This orientation defines the setting of the X1, X2, X3, and G0 fields on the CBEAM entry. This property is required.
If the Use Beam Section toggle is ON, a PBEAML entry is created. This entry is only supported in MSC. Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC.Nastran Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69 or later.
Warping due to torsion is enabled by generating MSC.Nastran SPOINTs to contain the warping degrees of freedom. These SPOINTs are not actually present in the MSC.Patran database, and there is no way to recover any results for these SPOINTs. They are created during analysis deck translation, and provide the means to communicate to MSC.Nastran the continuity and constraint properties of the warping degrees of freedom in the model. These attributes of continuity and constraint are implied in the MSC.Patran database through the composition of the element properties application region and the set of options selected. These continuity and constraint attributes apply to both warping SPOINTs and end release flags. This connection of these attributes to the composition of the application region is new in MSC.Patran 2001r3, and represents a change in behavior from previous versions of MSC.Patran. The general rules of implied continuity are as follows. 1. Within the application region, two beam elements are taken to be continuous if a GRID ID at an end of one of the beam elements matches a GRID ID at one of the ends of the other beam element. If a third beam element in the same application region also contains the same GRID ID, it is assumed that none of the beam elements is continuous at this location. This condition is known as a multiple junction. Similarly, if none of the other beam elements in the application region contain a matching GRID ID, the corresponding end of the beam element is taken to be not continuous. This condition is known as an unmatched end. 2. If warping is enabled, then all instances of beam element continuity must have the matching GRID ID located at End A of one of the beam elements and at End B of the other. End A and End B positions are determined by the order of GRID IDs specified in the element connectivity array, and the positive direction of the x-axis of the element coordinate system points from End A to End B. If warping is not enabled, this restiction does not apply. If warping is enabled, any violation of this requirement will result in a failure to complete the translation of the finite element model. In this event, the user will have to reverse the direction of the improperly oriented beam elements and initiate the translation again. 3. When warping is enabled, all positions of beam element continuity within an application region will be represented by a single SPOINT at each of these positions, which will be generated at the time of analysis deck translation and will appear on the CBEAM cards for the appropriate end of both of the beam elements that are continuous at each location. If any end release codes have been prescribed for the application region, they will not be applied at locations of beam element continuity. This is new for MSC.Patran 2001r3. For earlier versions of MSC.Patran, end release codes would be applied to all elements of the application region, regardless of continuity. 4. When warping is enabled, individual SPOINTs are generated for all beam ends that are not continuous. This applies to both multiple junctions and unmatched ends. 5. The specified end release codes are applied to all discontinuous beam element ends in the application region, whether multiple junction or unmatched end, with the applied end release codes dependent on what has been prescribed for End A and End B for the application region. If no end release codes have been prescribed for the application region, none are generated. 6. When warping is enabled, and for unmatched ends only (not multiple junctions), constraints applied to the SPOINTs are specified by the warping option specified in the element properties form. For example, if A free B fixed has been selected and the unmatched end is End A of its beam element, it will not be constrained. If it is End B of its element, it will be constrained. The warping SPOINT for a beam element
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
end involved in a multiple junction will not be constrained under any circumstances. If the user wishes to constrain warping for a beam element involved in a multiple junction, he will have to do so by splitting the application region in such a way that the beam element end becomes an unmatched end within its new application region. 7. Warping is considered to be enabled when a value has been specified for the warping coefficient at either end of the beam element. When the user selects the Beam Library option, values for the warping coefficient get computed autamatically, and thus warping is implicitly enabled. If the user wishes to disable warping while using the Beam Library option, he must choose None as his Warping Option on the Input Properties ... form. This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML element property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Warping Option Description This specifies how contraints should be applied to the warping SPOINTs of unmatched ends within the application region (see continuity rules above). The choices available include A free B free, A fixed B fixed, A free B fixed, A fixed B free, or None. The choice of None is used to disable warping altogether for the current element property set, in which case no SPOINTs will be generated or constrained. Only unmatched ends within the application region will be eligible for constraining, and whether or not a constraint is applied will depend on the option selected, and whether the unmatched end is End A or End B of its beam element. If no selection is made for this element property, A free B free is selected by default. Specifies the warping coefficient at each end of the element. These properties are the CW(A) and CW(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Defines stations along each beam element where the section properties will be defined. The values specified here are fractions of the beam length. These values, therefore, are in the range of 0. to 1. These values define the settings of the X/XB fields on the PBEAM record. This field consists of a set of real values separated by legal delimiters, such as white space and/or commas. If this list is entered, then the properties that follow may also be in the form of lists consisting of the same number of values. If they are in the form of a single real value, then that value will apply to all stations of the beam element. This property is optional. If it is not provided, then all other specified section properties apply to the entire beam, and lists of values will not be accepted. Defines the cross sectional area of the element. This property defines the settings of the A fields on the PBEAM record. This value can be either a real value, a list (if a list of stations has been provided), or a reference to an existing field definition, in which case a single real value will be evaluated for each element of the application region. This property is required.
Warp Coeff. @ Node 1 Warp Coeff. @ Node 2
Station Distances
Cross-Sect. Areas
Inertias 1,1 Inertias 2,2 Inertias 1,2
Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These values define the settings of the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values are single real values that apply to the entire beam, or a list of real values if a list of stations has been provided. These properties are optional. If they are not provided, values of 0 will be assumed. Defines the torsional stiffness parameters. This property defines the J fields on the PBEAM entry. This value is a single real value that applies to the entire beam, or a list of real values if a list of stations has been provided. This property is optional. If it is not provided, a value of 0 will be assumed. Defines the Y and Z locations in element coordinates, relative to the shear center, for stress data recovery. These define the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values are single real values that apply to the entire beam, or lists of real values if a list of stations has been provided. These properties are optional. If they are not provided, values of 0 will be assumed.
Torsional Constants
Ys of C Points Zs of C Points Ys of D Points Zs of D Points Ys of E Points Zs of E Points Ys of F Points Zs of F Points Nonstructural Masses
Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This property is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This value is a single real value that applies to the entire beam, or a list of real values if a list of stations has been provided. This property is optional. If it is not provided, a value of 0 will be assumed. Specifies the nonstructural mass moments of inertia per unit length about the nonstructural mass center of gravity at each end of the element. These properties are the NSI(A) and NSI(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Defines the offset from the shear center of the cross section to the location of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in the beam cross-section coordinate system. These are the M1(A), M2(A), M1(B), and M2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
NSM Inertia @ Node 1 NSM Inertia @ Node 2
Y of NSM @ Node 1 Z of NSM @ Node 1 Y of NSM @ Node 2 Z of NSM @ Node 2
Shear Stiff, Y Shear Stiff, Z
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Shear Relief Y Shear Relief Z
Defines the shear relief coefficients due to taper. These are the S1 and S2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Defines the offset from the shear center of the cross section to the location of the neutral axis. These values are measured in the beam cross-section coordinate system. These are the N1(A), N2(A), N1(B), and N2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Y of NA @ Node 1 Z of NA @ Node 1 Y of NA @ Node 2 Z of NA @ Node 2
General Section Rod (CROD)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 1D Type Rod Option(s) General Section Standard Topologies Bar/2
Use this form to create a CROD element and a PROD property. This defines a tensioncompression-torsion element of the structural model.
Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on the PROD entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.
Input Properties
General Section Rod (CROD) Property Name Value Value Type Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID field on the PROD entry. This property is required.
Material Name Area [Torsional Constant] [Tors. Stress Coeff.] [Nonstructural Mass]
Mat Prop Name Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar
Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This is the NSM field on the PROD entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. OK
Defines the coefficient to determine the torsional stress. This is the C field on the PROD entry. This property can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the PROD entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
General Section Rod (CONROD)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 1D Type Rod Option(s) General Section CONROD Topologies Bar/2
Use this form to create a CONROD element. This defines a tension-compression-torsion element of the structural model.
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID field on the CONROD entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
General Section Rod (CONROD) Property Name Value Value Type Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This property is the A field on the CONROD entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.
Material Name Area [Torsional Constant] [Tors. Stress Coeff.] [Nonstructural Mass]
OK
Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam and is the NSM field on the CONROD entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Defines the coefficient to determine the torsional stress. This property is the C field on the CONROD entry and can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This property is the J field on the CONROD entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Pipe Section Rod (CTUBE)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 1D Type Rod Option(s) Pipe Section Topologies Bar/2
Use this form to create a CTUBE element and a PTUBE property. This defines a tensioncompression-torsion element with a thin-walled tube cross section.
Defines the tube outer diameters at each end of the element. These are the OD and OD2 fields on the PTUBE entry. These values can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. The outer diameter at Node 1 property is required. The outer diameter at Node 2 Property is optional.
Input Properties
Pipe Section Rod (CTUBE) Property Name Value Value Type Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PTUBE entry. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property is required.
Material Name Outer Diameter @ Node [Outer Diam. @ Node 2] Pipe Thickness [Nonstructural Mass]
Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam and is the NSM field on the PRTUBE entry. This value can be either a real value or reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. OK
Specifies the wall thickness of the pipe. This is the T field on the PTUBE entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Scalar Spring (CELAS1)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 1D Type Spring Option(s) Topologies Bar/2
Use this form to create a CELAS1 element and a PELAS property. This defines a scalar spring of the structural model. Input Properties
Scalar Spring (CELAS1) Property Name Spring Constant [Damping Coefficient] [Stress Coefficient] Dof at Node 1 Dof at Node 2 Value Value Type Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar String String Defines what damping is to be included. This property is the GE field on the PELAS entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the coefficient to be used for this spring. This property is the K field on the PELAS entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.
OK
Defines which degree of freedom this value is to be attached to at each node. The degree of freedom can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ. These properties define the settings of the C1 and C2 fields on the CELAS1 entry. These properties are required.
Defines the relationship between the spring deflection and the stresses within the spring. This property is the S field on the PELAS entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Scalar Damper (CDAMP1)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 1D Type Damper Option(s) Scalar Topologies Bar/2
Use this form to create a CDAMP1 element and a PDAMP property. This defines a scalar damper element of the structural model. Input Properties
Scalar Damper (CDAMP1) Property Name Value Value Type Defines the force per unit velocity value to be used. This is the B field on the PDAMP entry and can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
[Damping Coefficient] Dof at Node 1 Dof at Node 2
Real Scalar String String
Defines which degree of freedom this value will be attached to at each node. This can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ. These define the settings of the C1 and C2 field on the CDAMP1 entry. These properties are required.
OK
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Viscous Damper (CVISC)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 1D Type Damper Option(s) Viscous Topologies Bar/2
Use this form to create a CVISC element and a PVISC property. This defines a viscous damper element of the structural model. Input Properties
Viscous Damper (CVISC) Property Name Value Value Type This is the C1 field on the PVISC entry. This property can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
[Ext. Viscous Coeff.] [Rot. Viscous Coeff.]
Real Scalar Real Scalar
This is the C2 field on the PVISC entry. This property can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
OK
Gap (CGAP)
This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 1D Type Gap Option(s) Adaptive Nonadaptive Topologies Bar/2
Use this form to create a CGAP element and a PGAP property. This defines a gap or frictional element of the structural model for non-linear analysis.
Defines the local element coordinate system for this element that can be defined in one of three ways. If the two end nodes of the gap are not coincident, then the Gap Orientation can reference a vector or a node ID. This local x-axis would then run between the two end nodes and the orientation information would define the local xy plane. However, if the two end nodes are coincident, then the Gap Orientation refers to an existing coordinate system definition and will be used as the local element coordinate system. This Gap Orientation defines the settings of the X1, X2, X3, G0, and CID fields on the CGAP entry. This property is required. Defines the initial opening of the gap element. The nodal coordinates are only used to define the closure direction. This property is the U0 field on the PGAP entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. OK
Input Properties
Gap (CGAP) Property Name Gap Orientation [Initial Opening] [Preload] Closed Stiffness [Opened Stiffness] [Sliding Stiffness] Value Value Type Vector Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar
Defines the artificial stiffness of the gap when the gap is open or closed. The closed stiffness should be chosen to closely match the stiffness of the surrounding elements. The open stiffness should be approximately 10 orders of magnitude less. These properties are the Ka and Kb fields on the PGAP entry and can either be real value or references to existing field definitions. The closed stiffness property is required. The opened stiffness property is optional. Defines an initial preload across an initially closed gap. For example, this can be used for initial thread loading. If the gap is initially open, setting this value to the initial opening stiffness will improve the solution convergence. This is the F0 field on the PGAP entry and can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CGAP element and a PGAP property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Sliding Stiffness Description Defines the artificial shear stiffness of the element when the element is closed. This is the Kt field on the PGAP entry. This property can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the static friction coefficient. This property is the MU1 field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field. Defines the kinematic friction coefficient. This property is the MU2 field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field. Defines the maximum allowable penetration. This property is the TMAX field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field. Defines the maximum allowable adjustment ratio. This property is the MAR field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field. Defines the lower bound for the allowable penetration. This is the TRMIN field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field. Defines the coefficient of friction when sliding occurs along this element in the local y and z directions. These are the MU1 and MU2 fields on the PGAP entry and can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Static Friction
Kinematic Friction
Max Penetration
Max Adjust Ratio
Penet. Lower Bound
Friction Coeff. y Friction Coeff. Z
Scalar Mass (CMASS1)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 1D Type 1D Mass Option(s) Topologies Bar/2
Use this form to create a CMASS1 element and a PMASS property. This defines a scalar mass element of the structural model. Input Properties
Scalar Mass (CMASS1) Property Name Value Value Type Defines the translation mass or rotational inertia value to be applied. This property is the M field on the PMASS entry and can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.
Mass Dof at Node 1 Dof at Node 2
Real Scalar String String
Defines which degree of freedom this value will be attached to at each node. These can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ and defines the settings of the C1 and C2 field on the CMASS1 entry. These properties are required.
OK
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
PLOTEL
This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 1D Type PLOTEL Option(s) Topologies Bar/2
Use this form to create a PLOTEL element. Input Properties

PLOTEL element Property Name [Dummy Property Data] Value Value Type String Dummy property data not required to define the PLOTEL property set.
OK
Scalar Bush
This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 1D Type Scalar Bush Option(s) Topologies Bar/2
Input Properties
Scalar Bush Joint Property Name [Bush Orientation] [Offset Location] [Offset Orientation Sys] [Offset Orientation Vec] [Spring Constant 1] [Spring constant 2] Value Value Type Vector Real Scalar CID Vector Real Scalar Real Scalar This toggle can also be set to Node Id or CID.
Field Definitions
OK
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Bush Orientation Description Element orientation strategy keys off of CID specification. If CID is blank, the element x-axis lies along the line which joins the elements grid points (GA, GB Element Properties/Application Region). The X-Y plane is determined by specifying the Bush Orientation. If a vector input is given, these components define an orientation vector v from the first grid point (GA) of the element in the displacement coordinate system at that point (GA). If the Bush Orientation references a grid point ID (Value), this orientation point forms an orientation vector which extends from the first element grid point to the orientation point. If a CID 0 is specified for Bush Orientation System, the element X,Y, and Z axes are aligned with the coordinate system principal axes. If the CID is for a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system, the first elemental grid point (GA) is used to locate the system. If CID = 0, the elemental coordinate system is the Basic Coordinate System. If no orientation is specified in any form, the element x-axis is along the line which connects the elements grid points. The material property inputs for this condition must be limited to simple axial and torsional stiffness and damping (k1,k4,B1,B4). Offset Location Offset Location (0.0 s 1.0) specifies the spring-damper location along the line from GRIDGA to GRIDGB by setting the fraction of the distance from GRIDGA. s=0.50 centers the spring-damper. Specifies the coordinate system used to locate the springdamper offset when it is not on the line from GRIDGA to GRIDGB. Provides the location of the spring-damper in space relative to the offset coordinate system. If the offset orientation system is -1 or blank, the offset orientation vector is ignored.
Offset Orientation System
Offset Orientation Vector
Prop Name Spring Constant 1 Spring Constant 2 Spring Constant 3 Spring Constant 4 Spring Constant 5 Spring Constant 6 Stiff. Freq Depend 1 Stiff. Freq Depend 2 Stiff. Freq Depend 3 Stiff. Freq Depend 4 Stiff. Freq Depend 5 Stiff. Freq Depend 6 Stiff. Force/Disp 1 Stiff. Force/Disp 2 Stiff. Force/Disp 3 Stiff. Force/Disp 4 Stiff. Force/Disp 5 Stiff. Force/Disp 6 Damping Coefficient 1 Damping Coefficient 2 Damping Coefficient 3 Damping Coefficient 4 Damping Coefficient 5 Damping Coefficient 6 Damp. Freq Depend 1 Damp. Freq Depend 2 Damp. Freq Depend 3 Damp. Freq Depend 4 Damp. Freq Depend 5 Damp. Freq Depend 6 Structural Damping Struc. Damp Freq Depend
Description Defines the stiffness associated with a particular degree of freedom. This property is defined in terms of force per unit displacement and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition for defining stiffness vs. frequency.
Defines the nonlinear force/displacement curves for each degree of freedom of the spring-damper system.
Defines the force per velocity damping value for each degree of freedom. This property can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency
Defines the non-dimensional structural damping coefficient (GE1). This property can be either a real value, or a reference to an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency. Stress Recovery Coefficients. The element stress are computed by multiplying the stress coefficients with the recovered element forces. Strain Recovery Coefficients. The element strains are computed by multiplying the strain coefficients with the recovered element strains.
Stress Recovery Translation Stress Recovery Rotation Strain Recovery Translation Strain Recovery Rotation
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Standard Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 2D Type Shell Option(s) Homogeneous Standard Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4 Tri/6, Quad/8
Use this form to create a CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CQUAD8, or CTRIA6 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank to achieve the requested behavior.
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select one from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This defines the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
Stan. Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4) Property Name Material Name [Material Orientation] Thickness [Nonstructural Mass] [Plate Offset] [Fiber Dist. 1] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name CID Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar
Defines the thickness, which will be uniform over each element. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4/8 and CTRIA3/6 entries and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.
OK
Defines the mass not derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUADi or CTRIAi entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value in degrees, a vector, or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUADi and a CTRIAi element and a PSHELL property, that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Plate Offset Description Defines the offset of the elements reference plane from the plane defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CQUAD4/8 entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the distance from the elements reference plane to the bottom and top most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.
Fiber Dist. 1 Fiber Dist. 2
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Revised Homogeneous Plate (CQUADR)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 2D Type Shell Option(s) Homogeneous Revised Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4
Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank to achieve the requested behavior.
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. This property is required. Defines a uniform thickness, which will cover each element. This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUADR or CTRIAR entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry and can be either a real value or a reference to existing field definition. This property is required. Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. and this is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Input Properties
Revised Homogeneous Plate (CQUADR) Property Name Material Name [Material Orientation] Thickness [Nonstructural Mass] [Fiber Dist.1] [Fiber Dist. 2] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name CID Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar
OK
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUADR or CTRIAR entry. This scalar value can be either a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
Defines the distance from the elements reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers. These properties are the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
P-Formulation Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an adaptive, p-element analysis. Action Create Dimension 2D Type Shell Option(s) Homogeneous P-Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4,Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9, Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13, Quad/16
Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC . Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC .Nastran Version in the Translation Parameter form must be set to 69.
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. This property is required. Defines a uniform thickness, which will cover each element. This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry and can be either a real value or a reference to existing field definition. This property is required. Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element and this is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the distance from the elements reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers respectively. These properties are the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Input Properties
P-Formulation Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4) Property Name Material Name [Material Orient. Angle [Material Orientation] Thickness [Nonstructural Mass] [Fiber Dist.1] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name Real Scalar CID Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar
OK Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate system is the material xaxis (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected xaxis of the basic system.This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This property is optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUAD4 and a CTRIA3 element, that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Plate Offset Description Defines the offset of the elements reference plane from the plane defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the distance from the elements reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional. Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements. Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined by the P--order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry. The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry.
P-order Coord. System
Activate Error Estimate Flag that controls whether or not this set of elements participates in the error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry. P-order Adaptivity Error Tolerance Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry. The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis.By default this value is equal to1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Standard Laminate Plate (CQUAD4/PCOMP)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 2D Type Shell Option(s) Laminate Standard Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4 Tri/6, Quad/8
Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PCOMP property.
Input Properties
Stan. Lam. Plate (CQUAD4/PCOMP) Property Name Material Name [Material Orientation] [Nonstructural Mass] [Plate Offset] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name CID Real Scalar Real Scalar
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type the name in. The specified material must be a laminate material in MSC.Patran. The data in this material definition defines the settings of the MIDi, Ti, and THETAi fields on the PCOMP entry. This property is required.
Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is the NSM field on the PCOMP entry. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the offset of the elements reference plane from the plane defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
OK
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6 CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Revised Laminate Plate (CQUADR/PCOMP)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 2D Type Shell Option(s) Laminate Revised Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4
Use this form to create a CQUADR or CTRIAR element and a PCOMP property.
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. The specified material must be a laminate material in MSC.Patran. The data in this material definition defines the settings of the MIDi, Ti, and THETAi fields on the PCOMP entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
Rev. Lam. Plate (CQUADR/PCOMP) Property Name Material Name [Material Orientation] [Nonstructural Mass] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name CID Real Scalar
Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is the NSM field on the PCOMP entry. This property is defined in mass per unit area, of the element. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
OK
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
Standard Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 2D Type Shell Option(s) Equivalent Section Standard Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4 Tri/6, Quad/8
Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.
Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and coupling behavior of the element. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. These properties define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. These properties are optional.
Input Properties
Stan. Equiv. Sec. Plate (CQUAD4) Property Name [Membrane Material] [Bending Material] [Shear Material] [Coupling Material] [Material Orientation] Thickness Value Value Type Mat Prop Name Mat Prop Name Mat Prop Name Mat Prop Name CID Real Scalar Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can be either a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
OK
Defines the uniform thickness for each element. This property defines the setting of the Ti, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Bending Stiffness Description Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This is the 12I/T3 field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the ratio of transverse shear thickness to the membrane thickness. This property is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This property is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the offset of the elements reference plane from the plane defined by the nodal locations. This property is the ZOFFS field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the distance from the elements reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties are the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Thickness Ratio
Nonstructural Mass
Plate Offset
Fiber Distance 1 Fiber Distance 2
Revised Equivalent Section Plate (CQUADR)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 2D Type Shell Option(s) Equivalent Section Revised Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4
Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.
Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and coupling behavior of the element. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. These properties define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields, on the PSHELL entry. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. These properties are optional.
Input Properties
Rev. Equiv. Sect. Plate (CQUADR) Property Name [Membrane Material] [Bending Material] [Shear Material] [Material Orientation] Thickness [Bending Stiffness] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name Mat Prop Name Mat Prop Name CID Real Scalar Real Scalar Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This property defines the setting of the THETA field on the CQUADR or CTRIAR entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
OK
Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each element. This property defines the setting of the Ti, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a references to an existing field definition. This property is required.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Bending Stiffness Description Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This property is the 12I/T3 field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the ratio of transverse shear thickness to the membrane thickness. This is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the distance from the elements reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers respectively. These properties are the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Thickness Ratio
Nonstructural Mass
Fiber Distance 1 Fiber Distance 2
P-Formulation Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an adaptive, p-element analysis. Action Create Dimension 2D Type Shell Option(s) Equivalent Section P-Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9, Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13, Quad/16
Use this form to create a CQUAD4, or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior. The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC .Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC . Nastran Version in the Translation Parameter form must be set to 69.
Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and coupling behavior of the element. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. These properties define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields, on the PSHELL entry. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. These properties are optional.
Input Properties
P-Formulation Equiv. Sect. Plate (CQUAD4) Property Name [Membrane Material] [Bending Material] [Shear Material] [Material Orient. Angle [Material Orientation] Thickness Value Value Type Mat Prop Name Mat Prop Name Mat Prop Name Real Scalar CID Real Scalar
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate system is the material x-axis (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-axis of basic system.This property is optional.
Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each element. This property defines the setting of the Ti, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIAR3 or CQUAD4 entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a references to an existing field definition. This property is required.
OK
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUAD4 and a CTRIA3 element that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Bending Stiffness Description Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This property is the 12I/T3 field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the ratio of transverse shear thickness to the membrane thickness. This is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the offset of the elements reference plane from the plane defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3entry and can be either real value or reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the distance from the elements reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real value or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional. Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements. Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi fields in the PVAL entry. The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry.
Thickness Ratio
Nonstructural Mass
Plate Offset
Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error analysis. This is the ERREST field in the ADAPT entry. P-order Adaptivity Error Tolerance Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry. The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default, equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Prop Name
Description
Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default, equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default, equal to1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Standard Bending Panel (CQUAD4)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 2D Type Bending Panel Option(s) Standard Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4 Tri/6, Quad/8
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
Stan. Bending Panel (CQUAD4) Property Name Material Name [Material Orientation] Thickness [Nonstructural Mass] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name CID Real Scalar Real Scalar
Defines the uniform thickness for each element. This defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4/8 and CTRIA3/6 entries and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.
OK
Defines the mass not derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in mass per unit area of the element and is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4 or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Fiber Dist. 1 Fiber Dist. 2 Description Defines the distance from the elements reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers respectively. These properties define the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and these values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Revised Bending Panel (CQUADR)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 2D Type Bending Panel Option(s) Revised Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4
Input Properties
Rev. Bending Panel (CQUADR) Property Name Material Name [Material Orientation] Thickness [Nonstructural Mass] [Fiber Dist. 1] [Fiber Dist. 2] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name CID Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each element. This defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definitions. This property is required. Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can either be real values or a reference to and existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the distance from the elements reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties are the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional. Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.
OK
P-Formulation Bending Panel (CQUAD4)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an adaptive, p-element analysis. Action Create Dimension 2D Type Bending Panel Option(s) P- Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9, Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13, Quad/16
Use this form to create a CTRIA3, or CQUAD4 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior. The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC .Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC . Nastran Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69. Input Properties
P-Formulation Bending Panel (CQUAD4) Property Name Material Name [Material Orient. Angle [Material Orientation] Thickness Value Value Type Mat Prop Name Real Scalar CID Real Scalar Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each element. This defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry and this value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required. Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.
OK
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate system is the material x-axis or (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-axis of basic system.This property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This property is optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3 or CQUAD4 element and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Nonstructural Mass Description Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the distance from the elements reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements. Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry. The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry.
Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry. P-order Adaptivity Error Tolerance Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry. The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Axisymmetric Solid (CTRIAX6)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 2D Type 2D Solid Option(s) Axisymmetric Topologies Tri/3, Tri/6
Use this form to create a CTRIAX6 axisymmetric solid element. This defines an isoparametric and axisymmetric triangular cross section ring element with midside nodes.
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the TH field on the CTRIAX6 entry. This scalar value can be either a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
Input Properties
Axisym Solid (CTRIAX6) Property Name [Material Orientation] Material Name Value Value Type CID Mat Prop Name Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID field on the CTRIAX6 entry. This property is required.
OK
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Standard Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 2D Type 2D Solid Option(s) Plane Strain Standard Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4 Tri/6, Quad/8
Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior. Input Properties
Stn. Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4) Property Name Material Name Value Value Type Mat Prop Name Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. The MID2 field on the PSHELL entry will be set to -1 to define plane strain behavior. This property is required.
OK
Revised Plane Strain Solid (CQUADR)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 2D Type 2D Solid Option(s) Plane Strain Revised Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4
Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior. Input Properties
Rev. Plane Strain Solid (CQUADR) Property Name Value Value Type Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. The MID2 field on the PSHELL entry will be set to -1 to define plane strain behavior. This property is required.
Material Name
Mat Prop Name
OK
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an adaptive, p-element analysis. Action Create Dimension 2D Type 2D Solid Option(s) Plane Strain P- Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9, Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13, Quad/16
Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior. The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC .Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC . Nastran Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69. Input Properties
P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4) Property Name Material Name [Material Orient. Angle [Material Orientation] [Starting P-orders] [Maximum P-orders] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name Real Scalar CID Vector Vector Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements. Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum Porders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry. Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required. The MID2 field on the PSHELL entry will be set to -1 to define plane strain behavior.
OK
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate system is the material x-axis (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-axis of basic system. This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This property is optional.
Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are: Prop Name P-order Coord. System Description The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry. Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry. Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry. The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Activate Error Estimate P-order Adaptivity Error Tolerance
Stress Threshold Value
Strain Threshold Value
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Standard Membrane (CQUAD4)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 2D Type Membrane Option(s) Standard Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4 Tri /6, Quad/8
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required. Defines the uniform thickness that will be used for each element. This value can either be a real value or reference an existing field definition. This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required. Defines the mass not derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in mass per unit area of the element and is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Input Properties
Stan. Membrane (CQUAD4) Property Name Material Name [Material Orientation] Thickness [Nonstructural Mass] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name CID Real Scalar Real Scalar
OK
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1)reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element. (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
Revised Membrane (CQUADR)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 2D Type Membrane Option(s) Revised Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4
Input Properties
Rev. Membrane (CQUADR) Property Name Material Name [Material Orientation] Thickness [Nonstructural Mass] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name CID Real Scalar Real Scalar
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This defines the settings of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.
Defines the uniform thickness that will be used for each element. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.
OK
Defines the mass not derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element and is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
P-Formulation Membrane (CQUAD4)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an adaptive, p-element analysis. Action Create Dimension 2D Type Membrane Option(s) P- Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9. Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13, Quad/16
Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior. The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC .Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC . Nastran Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69. Input Properties
P-Formulation Membrane (CQUAD4) Property Name Material Name [Material Orient. Angle [Material Orientation] [Starting P-orders] [Maximum P-orders] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name Real Scalar CID Vector Vector Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements. Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum Porders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry. Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.
OK
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate system is the material x-axis or (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-axis of basic system. This property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This property is optional.
Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are: Prop Name P-order Coord. System Description The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry. Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry. Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry. The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Shear Panel (CSHEAR)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 2D Type Shear Panel Option(s) Topologies Quad/4
Use this form to create a CSHEAR element and a PSHEAR property. This defines a shear panel element of the structural model.
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This defines the settings of the MID field on the PSHEAR entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
Shear Panel (CSHEAR) Property Name Material Name Thickness [Nonstructural Mass] [Extensional Stiff. 12] [Extensional Stiff. 14] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar Real Scalar
Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field on the PSHEAR entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
OK
Defines the effectiveness factor for extensional stiffness along the 1-2 and 3-4 sides. This is the F1 field on the PSHEAR entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each element. This defines the T field on the PSHEAR entry. This property is required. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition.
Defines the effectiveness factor for extensional stiffness along the 2-3 and 1-4 sides. This is the F2 field on the PSHEAR entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Solid (CHEXA)
This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Create Dimension 3D Type Solid Option(s) Standard Topologies Tet/4, Wedge/6 Hex/8, Tet/10 Wedge/15, Hex/20
Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PSOLID property.
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the MID field on the PSOLID entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
Solid (CHEXA) Property Name Material Name [Mater. Orientation] [Integration Network] [Integration Scheme] [Output Locations] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name String String String String
Defines the type of integration network to be used. This property is the IN field on the PSOLID entry and can be set to Bubble, Two, or Three. This property is optional.
Defines the integration scheme to be used. This property is the ISOP field on the PSOLID entry and can be set to Reduced or Full. This property is optional. Defines where the output for these elements are to be reported. This property can be set to either Gauss or Grid and is the STRESS field on the PSOLID entry. This property is optional. OK
Defines both the orientation of referenced nonisotropic materials and solid element results. This can be set to Global, Elemental, or to a specific coordinate frame reference and defines the CORDM field on the PSOLID entry. The default is Global. Nonlinear stresses and strains are output in the Elemental system regardless of the setting.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
P-Formulation Solid (CHEXA)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an adaptive, p-element analysis: Action Create Dimension 3D Type Solid Option(s) P-Formulation Topologies Tet/4, Wedge/6 Hex/8, Tet/10 Wedge/15, Hex/20, Tet/16, Tet/40, Wedge/24,Wedge/52, Hex/32, Hex/64
Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PSOLID property. Input Properties
P-Formulation Solid (CHEXA) Property Name Material Name [Mater. Orientation] [Starting P-orders] [Minimum P-orders] [Maximum P-orders] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name String Vector Vector Vector Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements. Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined by the P-order Coord. System (default elemental). Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum Porders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry. Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PSOLID entry. This property is required.
OK
Defines orientation for the referenced material. This property can be set to Global, Elemental or to a user-defined coordinate system and defines the CORDM field on the PSOLID entry. The default is Global. This property is optional.
Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are: Prop Name P-order Coord. System Description The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry. Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry. Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry. The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default the value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default the value is equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default the value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Defines the type of integration network to be used. This property is the IN field on the PSOLID entry and can be set to Bubble, Two, or Three. This property is optional. Defines where the output for these elements are to be reported. This can be set to either Gauss or Grid. This property is the STRESS field on the PSOLID entry. This property is optional.
Integration Network
Integration Scheme
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Hyperelastic Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for a nonlinear analysis: Action Create Dimension 2D Type 2D Solid Option(s) Plane Strain Hyperelastic Formulation Topologies Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Quad/9
Use this form to create a CQUAD, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CTRIA3, or CTRIA6 element and a PLPLANE property. Input Properties
Hyp. Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4) Property Name Material Name [Plane of Deformation]] [Output Locations]] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name CID String Location of stress and strain output. the options are GAUS (default) or GRID. this defines the STR field on the PLPLANE entry. Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PLPLANE entry. This property is required.
OK
Identification number of a coordinate system defining the plane of deformation. This defines the CID field on the PLPLANE entry.
Hyperelastic Axisym Solid (CTRIAX6)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for a nonlinear analysis: Action Create Dimension 2D Type 2D Solid Option(s) Axisymmetric Hyperelastic Formulation Topologies CQUADX, CTRIAX
Use this form to create a CQUADX or CTRIAX element and a PLPLANE property. Input Properties
Hype. Axisym Solid (CTRIAX6) Property Name Material Name [Output Locations]] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name String Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PLPLANE entry. This property is required.
Location of stress and strain output. the options are GAUS (default) or GRID. this defines the STR field on the PLPLANE entry.
OK
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Hyperelastic Solid (CHEXA)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for a nonlinear analysis: Action Create Dimension 3D Type Solid Option(s) Hyperelastic Formulation Topologies HEX, PENT, TET
Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PLSOLID property. Input Properties
Hyperelastic Solid (CHEXA) Property Name Material Name [Output Locations]] Value Value Type Mat Prop Name String Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PLSOLID entry. This property is required.
Location of stress and strain output. the options are GAUS (default) or GRID. this defines the STR field on the PLSOLID entry.
OK
2.8
Beam Modeling
Modeling structures composed of beams can be more complicated than modeling shell, plate, or solid structures. First, it is necessary to define bending, extensional, and torsional stiffness that may be complex functions of the beam cross sectional dimensions. Then it is necessary to define the orientation of this cross section in space. Finally, if the centroid of the cross section is offset from the two finite element nodes defining the beam element, these offsets must be explicitly defined. Fortunately, MSC.Patran provides a number of tools to simplify these aspects of modeling.
Cross Section Definition

The cross section properties are defined on the element property forms shown on pages General Section Beam (CBAR) (p. 77) and Tapered Beam (CBEAM) (p. 90). The properties can be entered directly into the data boxes labeled Area, Inertia i,j, Torsional Constant, etc. or by pushing the large I-beam icon on these forms to access the Beam Library form. The Beam Library forms are a much more convenient way of defining properties for standard cross sections and are shown below.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Create Action. The first step in using the beam library is to select the section icon for the particular cross section desired (e.g. I-section).Then the dimensions for each of the components of the beam section must be entered.
Beam Library
Action: Type: Create Standard Shape Current beam section as selected from the section library icon palette. The required dimensions are shown. H W1 W2 t t1 t2
Existing Sections * Hexagonal I-Beam Solid-Rod New Section Name I-Beam Filter
10. 7. 4. 1.1 0.7 0.5

Enter the dimensions of the beam section here, referring to the beam section icon.
Beam section library icon palette. Select the icon representing the desired section.
Calculate /Display
Write to Report File
These forward and backward arrows provide access to additional beam section icons.
Writes the current beam properties to a report file.
Calculates the beam properties based on the current dimensions and displays an image of the scaled section along with the properties. OK Apply Reset Cancel
Beam section name to be created. List of existing beam sections. This list can be filtered to contain only the section names of interest using the filter mechanism.
Finally, a section name must be entered and the Apply button pushed. The other options available with the beam library are documented in the MSC.Patran Users Guide Tools>Beam Library (p. 370) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Once one or more beam sections have been defined, these can be selected in the section data box on the element properties form. Supplied Functions. I-Beam - Six dimensions -- lower flange thickness (t1), upper flange thickness (t2),lower flange width (w1), upper flange width (w2), overall height (H), and web thickness (t)-- allows for symmetric or unsymmetrical I-beam definition. Angle - Open section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), horizontal flange thickness (t1), vertical flange thickness (t2).
Tee - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), horizontal flange thickness (t1), vertical flange thickness (t2).
Solid-Rod - Solid section, one dimension -- radius (R).
Box-Symmetric - Closed section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), top and bottom flange thicknesses (t1), side flange thicknesses (t2).
Tube - Closed section, two dimensions -- outer radius (R1), inner radius (R2).
Channel - Open section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), top and bottom flange thicknesses (t1), shear web thickness (t).
Bar - Solid section, two dimensions -- height (H) and width (W).
Box-Unsymmetrical - Closed section, six dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), top flange thickness (t1), bottom flange thickness (t2), right side flange thickness (t3), left side flange thickness (t4). Hat - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), top of hat flange width (W), bottom of hat flange width for one side (W1), thickness (t).
H-Beam - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), width between inner edges of vertical flanges (W), horizontal shear web thickness (t), and thickness of one vertical flange (W1/2).
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Cross - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), vertical flange thickness (t), horizontal flange thickness (t2), length of free horizontal flange for one side (W/2).
Z-Beam - Four dimensions -- overall height (H2), height of vertical flange between as measured between horizontal flanges, length of free horizontal flange for one side (W), thickness (t1). Hexagonal - Solid section, three dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), horizontal distance from side vertex to top or bottom surface vertex along the common edge (i.e., diagonal edge hypotenuse times the cosine of the exterior diagonal angle).
Cross Section Orientation

The Bar Orientation data box on the Input Properties form is used to define how the y-axis of the beam cross section is oriented in space. By default the Value Type is Vector. This tells MSC Nastran that the cross section y-axis lies in the plane defined by the beams x-axis (the line connecting the two node points) and this vector. The Value Type pop up menu may be changed to Node ID. In this case the y-axis lies in the plane defined by the x-axis and the selected node. When the Value Type is Vector and the Bar Orientation data box is selected the following select box appears on the screen.
These select tools provide different options for defining vectors. They are discussed in more detail in the Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
These three tools define the orientation vector as the 1 (x), 2(y), or 3(z) axis of a selected coordinate system. This is a convenient way to specify the orientation when it is aligned with one of the three axes of a rectangular coordinate system. When the system is not rectangular (e.g. cylindrical) these tools may not provide the desired definition because the defined vector does not change direction at different points in space--these tools just provide an alternate way to define a global vector.
These tools provide different ways to define vectors. In addition, the user is requested to select a coordinate system in which this vector is defined. The simplest list processor syntax that appears in the databox for a vector in an alternate coordinate system is <x_component, y_component, z_component> coord cord_id (e.g. <1, 0, 0> coord 3). In many cases it is easy to simply type a definition in this form into the Bar Orientation databox.
This tool may be used to define a general vector with respect to an alternate coordinate system. When this icon is picked, the select menu changes to the one on the right.
After the orientation has been defined, there are two ways to verify its correctness in MSC.Patran. The first option is in the Element Properties application. By selecting the Show Action, the Definition of X Y Plane property, and Display Method Vector Plot, the vectors defining the orientation will be shown on the model. A second option can be used when the Beam Library has been used to define the beam cross section. There is an option on the Display form Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes (p. 293) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions called Beam Display. The menu allows different display options for displaying an outline of the defined cross section on the model in the correct location and orientation. Users should be aware of one difference between the MSC.Patran and MSC . Nastran definitions for cross section orientation. In MSC.Patran the orientation is completely independent of the analysis coordinate system at the beam nodes. In MSC. Nastran, the orientation vector is assumed to be defined in the same system as the analysis system at the first node of the beam. In MSC.Patran it is perfectly permissible to define the orientation in a different coordinate system from that analysis system. When the NASTRAN input file is generated, the necessary transformation of this vector to the analysis system at node 1 will be performed.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Cross Section End Offsets

Two data boxes are provided on the Element Properties, Input Properties form to optionally define an offset from either node 1 to the cross section centroid (Offset @ Node 1) or from node 2 to the cross section centroid (Offset @ Node 2). The same select menu tools are available for defining these vectors. One difference between the orientation definition and the offset definitions, however, is that for the offset the magnitude of the vector is important. Because of this, the select menu tools are usually not very convenient. Typically, offsets are defined by typing the definition (e.g <x, y, z> or <x, y, z> coord n>) into the appropriate data box. Two options are available for verifying the definitions of offsets; these options are very similar to those for orientations. The Element Properties, Show Action will allow the end offsets to be displayed as vectors on the model. This option is not especially useful because the vector plot shows only the direction of the offset, not the magnitude of the offset. It is usually much more useful to view the Beam Display menu on the Display form Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes (p. 293) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions to select the display option with offsets. The viewport will then show the beam displayed in both the offset and non-offset positions.
Stiffened Cylinder Example

Figure 2-1 shows a simple example of a circular cylinder stiffened with Z-stiffeners. The cross section was defined by selecting the Beam Library icon on the Element Properties/Input Properties form. The Z cross section was selected on the Beam Library form, the cross section dimensions input, a section name input, and the Apply button pushed. On the Input Properties form, the Use Beam Section toggle is set to ON. The defined section name is selected in the [Section Name] data box. The string <-1.0 0. 0.> coord 1 is typed into the Bar Orientation data box to align the cross section orientation with the radial direction of the global, cylindrical system. Similarly, the strings <-2.0 0.0 0.0> coord 1 and <-2.0 0.0 0.0> coord 1 typed into the Offset @ Node 1 and Offset @ Node 2 data boxes define the end offsets to be radially inward.
T Z1 R
Y Z X
Figure 2-1 Stiffened Cylinder
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
2.9
Loads and Boundary Conditions

The Loads and Boundary Conditions form will appear when the Loads/BCs toggle, located on the MSC.Patran main form, is chosen. When creating a load and boundary condition there are several option menus. The selections made on the Loads and Boundary Conditions menu will determine which load and boundary conditions form appears, and ultimately, which MSC .Nastran loads and boundary conditions will be created. The following pages give an introduction to the Loads and Boundary Conditions form and details of all the loads and boundary conditions supported by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Analysts Preference.
MSC.Patran
Loads & Boundary Conditions Form

This form appears when Loads/BCs is selected on the main menu. The Loads and Boundary Conditions form is used to provide options to create the various MSC .Nastran loads and boundary conditions. For a definition of full functionality, see Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 18) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments. Options for defining slide line contact are also accessed from this main Loads and Boundary Conditions form. For more information see Defining Contact Regions (p. 168).
Defines the general load type to be applied. Object choices are Displacement, Force, Pressure, Temperature, Inertial Load, Initial Displacement, Initial Velocity, Velocity, Acceleration, Distributed Load, CID Distributed Load, Total Load, Contact, and Initial Temperature.
Load/Boundary Conditions
Action: Object: Type: Create Displacement Nodal Defines what type of region is to be loaded. The available options depend on the selected Object. The general selections can be Nodal, Element Uniform, or Element Variable. Nodal is applied explicitly to nodes. Element Uniform defines a constant value to be applied over an entire element, element face, or element edge. Element Variable defines a value that varies across an entire element, element face, or element edge.
Analysis Type: Current Load Case:
Structural
Default... Type: Static
Existing Sets
Current Load Case type is set on the Load Case menu. When the Load Cases toggle located on the main menu is chosen, the Load Cases menu will appear. Under Load Case Type, select either Static or Time Dependent, then enter the name of the case, and click on the Apply button.
New Set Name
Target Element Type:
2D
Defines the target element type to which this load will be applied. This only appears if the type is Element Uniform or Element Variable. This can be 0D, 1D, 2D, or 3D.
Input Data... Select Application Region...
Generates either a Static (p. 156) or Time Dependent (p. 157) Input Data form, depending on the current Load Case Type.
-Apply-
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
The following table outlines the options when Create is the selected action. Object Displacement Type Nodal Element Uniform Element Variable Force Pressure Temperature Nodal Element Uniform Element Variable Nodal Element Uniform Element Variable Inertial Load Initial Displacement Initial Velocity Velocity Acceleration Distributed Load CID Distributed Load Total Load Contact Initial Temperature Element Uniform Nodal Nodal Nodal Nodal Element Uniform Element Variable Element Uniform Element Variable Element Uniform Element Uniform Nodal
Static This subordinate form appears when the Input Data button is selected on the Loads and Boundary Conditions form and the Current Load Case Type is Static. The Current Load Case Type is set on the Load Case form. For more information see Loads & Boundary Conditions Form (p. 154). The information on the Input Data form will vary depending on the selected Object. Defined below is the standard information found on this form. Input Data
Load/BC Set Scale Factor 1 Defines a general scaling factor for all values defined on this form. The default value is 1.0. Primarily used when field definitions are used to define the load values.
Translations (T1, T2, T3) Input Data in this section will vary. See (p. 158) for detailed information. Rotations (R1, R2, R3)
Object Tables
Spatial Fields
When specifying real values in the Input Data entries, spatial fields can be referenced. All defined spatial fields currently in the database are listed. If the input focus is placed in the Input Data entry and a spatial field is selected by clicking in this list, a reference to that field will be entered in the Input Data entry.
FEM Dependent Data...
This button will display a Discrete FEM Fields input form to allow field creation and modification within the loads/bcs application. Visible only when focus is set in a databox which can have a DFEM field reference.
Analysis Coordinate Frame Coord 0 Defines the coordinate frame used to interpret the degree-offreedom data defined on this form. This only appears on the form for Nodal type loads. This can be a reference to any existing coordinate frame definition.
OK
Reset
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Time Dependent This subordinate form appears when the Input Data button is selected on the Loads and Boundary Condition form and the Current Load Case Type is Time Dependent. The Current Load Case Type is set on the Load Case form. For more information see Loads & Boundary Conditions Form (p. 154) and Load Cases (p. 167). The information on the Input Data form will vary, depending on the selected Object. Defined below is the standard information found on this form.
Input Data
Load/BC Set Scale Factor 1 Spatial Dependence Trans Accel (A1,A2,A3) Rot Velocity (w1,w2,w3) * Time Dependence
Defines a general scaling factor for all values defined on this form.The default value is 1.0. Primarily used when field definitions are used to define the load values.
Input Data in this section will vary. See Object Tables (p. 158) for detailed information.
Rot Accel (a1,a2,a3) When specifying time dependent values in the Input Data entries, time-dependent fields can be referenced. All defined time-dependent fields currently in the database are listed. If the input focus is placed in the Input Data entry and a time-dependent field is selected by clicking in this list, a reference to that field will be entered in the Input Data entry.
Spatial Fields
Time Dependent Fields
FEM Dependent Data...
Analysis Coordinate Frame Coord 0 Defines the coordinate frame to be used to interpret the degree-of-freedom data defined on this form. This only appears on the form for Nodal type loads. This can be a reference to any existing coordinate frame definition.
OK
Reset
This button will display a Discrete FEM Fields input form to allow field creation and modification within the loads/bcs application. Visible only when focus is set in a databox which can have a DFEM field reference.
When specifying real values in the Input Data entries, spatial fields can be referenced. All defined spatial fields currently in the database are listed. If the input focus is placed in the Input Data entry and a spatial field is selected by clicking in this list, a reference to that field will be entered in the Input Data entry.
Object Tables
These are areas on the static and transient input data forms where the load data values are defined. The data fields that appear depend on the selected load Object and Type. In some cases, the data fields also depend on the selected Target Element Type. The following Object Tables outline and define the various input data that pertains to a specific selected object: Displacement Object Displacement Type Nodal Analysis Type Structural
Creates MSC . Nastran SPC1 and SPCD Bulk Data entries. All non blank entries will cause an SPC1 entry to be created. If the specified value is not 0.0, an SCPD entry will also be created to define the non zero enforced displacement or rotation. Input Data Translations (T1,T2,T3) Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Description Defines the enforced translational displacement values. These are in model length units. Defines the enforced rotational displacement values. These are in radians.
Object Displacement
Type Element Uniform Element Variable
Dimension 3D
Applies a zero or nonzero displacement boundary condition to the face of solid elements. The primary use of this boundary condition is to apply constraints to p-elements; but it may also be used for standard solid elements. If applied to a p-element solid, the appropriate FEFACE and GMBC entries are created. If applied to a standard solid element, the appropriate SPC1 and SPCD entries are created. Input Data Translations (T1,T2,T3) Description Defines the enforced translational displacement values. These values are in model-length units.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Force Object Force Type Nodal Analysis Type Structural
Creates MSC.Nastran FORCE and MOMENT Bulk Data entries. Input Data Force (F1,F2,F3) Description Defines the applied forces in the translation degrees of freedom. This defines the N vector and the F magnitude on the FORCE entry. Defines the applied moments in the rotational degrees of freedom. This defines the N vector and the M magnitude on the MOMENT entry.
Moment (M1,M2,M3)
Pressure Object Pressure Type Element Uniform Analysis Type Structural Dimension 2D
Creates MSC . Nastran, PLOAD4, PLOADX1, or FORCE Bulk Data entries. Input Data Top Surf Pressure Description Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4 entry. The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. These values are all equal for a given element, producing a uniform pressure field across that face. Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4 entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values.These values are all equal for a given element, producing a uniform pressure field across that face. For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1 through P3 values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on that entry is defined as zero. For other 2D elements, this will be interpreted as a load per unit length (i.e. independent of thickness) and converted into equivalent nodal loads (FORCE entries). If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated at the middle of the application region.
Bot Surf Pressure
Edge Pressure
Object Pressure
Type Element Uniform
Dimension 3D
Creates MSC . Nastran PLOAD4 Bulk Data entries. Input Data Pressure Description Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a PLOAD4 entry. This defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated once at the center of the applied region.
Object Pressure
Type Element Variable
Dimension 2D
Creates MSC . Nastran, PLOAD4, PLOADX1, or FORCE Bulk Data entries. Input Data Top Surf Pressure Description Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4 entry. The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for the P1 through P4 values. Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4 entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for the P1 through P4 values. For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1 through P3 values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on that entry is defined as zero. For other 2D elements, this will be interpreted as a load per unit length (e.g., independent of thickness) and converted into equivalent nodal loads (FORCE entries). If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated independently at each node.
Bot Surf Pressure
Edge Pressure
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Object Pressure
Dimension 3D
Creates MSC .Nastran PLOAD4 Bulk Data entries. Input Data Pressure Description Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a PLOAD4 entry. This defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for each of the P1 through P4 values.
Temperature Object Temperature Type Nodal Analysis Type Structural
Creates MSC .Nastran TEMP Bulk Data entries. Input Data Temperature Description Defines the T fields on the TEMP entry.
Object Temperature
Dimension 1D
Creates MSC . Nastran TEMPRB Bulk Data entries. Input Data Temperature Description Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPRB entry. The temperature value is used for both the TA and TB fields. The T1a, T1b, T2a, and T2b fields are all defined as 0.0.
Object Temperature
Dimension 2D
Creates MSC . Nastran TEMPP1 Bulk Data entries. Input Data Temperature Description Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPP1 entry. The temperature value is used for the T field. The gradient through the thickness is defined to be 0.0.
Object Temperature
Dimension 1D
Creates MSC . Nastran TEMPRB Bulk Data entries. Input Data Centroid Temp Description Defines a variable temperature file using a TEMPRB entry. A field reference will be evaluated at either end of the element to define the TA and TB fields. Defines the temperature gradient in the 1 direction. A field reference will be evaluated at either end of the element to define the T1a and T1b fields. Defines the temperature gradient in the 2 direction. A field reference will be evaluated at either end of the element to define the T2a and T2b fields.
Axis-1 Gradient
Axis-2 Gradient
Object Temperature
Dimension 2D
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Creates MSC . Nastran TEMPP1 Bulk Data entries. Input Data Top Surf Temp Description Defines the temperature on the top surface of a shell element. The top and bottom values are used to compute the average and gradient values on the TEMPP1 entry. Defines the temperature on the bottom surface of a shell element. The top and bottom values are used to compute the average and gradient values on the TEMPP1 entry.
Bot Surf Temp
Object Temperature
Dimension 1D, 2D, 3D
This option applies only to the P-formulation elements. A TEMPF and DEQATN entry are created for the constant temperature case. A TEMPF and TABLE3D entry are created for the case when a spatial field is referenced. Input Data Temperature Inertial Load Object Inertial Load Type Element Uniform Analysis Type Structural Description Defines the temperature or temperature distribution in the element.
Creates MSC . Nastran GRAV and RFORCE Bulk Data entries. Input Data Trans Accel (A1,A2,A3) Rot Velocity (w1,w2,w3) Rot Accel (a1,a2,a3) Description Defines the N vector and the G magnitude value on the GRAV entry. Defines the R vector and the A magnitude value on the RFORCE entry. Defines the R vector and the RACC magnitude value on the RFORCE entry.
The acceleration and velocity vectors are defined with respect to the input analysis coordinate frame. The origin of the rotational vectors is the origin of the analysis coordinate frame. Note that rotational velocity and rotational acceleration cannot be defined together in the same set.In generating the GRAV and RFORCE entries, the interface produces one GRAV and/or RFORCE entry image for each MSC.Patran load set. Initial Displacement Object Initial Displacement Type Nodal Analysis Type Structural
Creates a set of MSC .Nastran TIC Bulk Data entries. Input Data Translations (T1,T2,T3) Description Defines the U0 fields for translational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry. Defines the U0 fields for rotational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.
Rotations (R1,R2,R3)
Initial Velocity Object Initial Velocity Type Nodal Analysis Type Structural
Creates a set of MSC .Nastran TIC Bulk Data entries. Input Data Trans Veloc (v1,v2,v3) Description Defines the V0 fields for translational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry. Defines the V0 fields for rotational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.
Rot Veloc (w1,w2,w3)
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Distributed Load Object Distributed Load Type Element Uniform Element Variable Analysis Type Structural Dimension 1D
Defines distributed force or moment loading along beam elements using MSC . Nastran PLOAD1 entries. The coordinate system in which the load is applied is defined by the beam axis and the Bar Orientation element property. The Bar Orientation must be defined before this Distributed Load can be created. If the Bar Orientation is subsequently changed, the Distributed Load must be updated manually if necessary. For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at each end of the beam to define a linear load variation. Input Data Edge Distributed Load (f1,f2,f3) Edge Distributed Moment (m1,m2,m3) Description Defines the FXE, FYE, and FZE fields on three PLOAD1 entries. Defines the MXE, MYE, and MZE fields on three PLOAD1 entries.
Object Distributed Load
Dimension 2D
Defines a distributed force or moment load along the edges of 2D elements. The coordinate system for the load is defined by the surface or element edge and normal. The x direction is along the edge. Positive x is determined by the element corner node connectivity. See The MSC.Patran Element Library (p. 259) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling. For example, if the element is a CQUAD4, with node connectivity of 1, 2, 3, 4. The positive x directions for each edge would be from nodes 1 to 2, 2 to 3, 3 to 4, and 4 to 1. The z direction is normal to the surface or element. Positive z is in the direction of the element normal. The y direction is normal to x and z. Positive y is determined by the cross product of the z and x axes and always points into the element. The MSC.Nastran entries generated, depend on the element type.
For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at all element nodes lying on the edge. Input Data Edge Distributed Load (f1,f2,f3) Description For axisymmetric solid elements (CTRIAX6), the PA, PB, and THETA fields on the PLOADX1 entry are defined. For other 2D elements, the input vector is interpreted as load per unit length and converted into equivalent nodal loads (FORCE entries). For 2D shell elements, the input vector is interpreted as moment per unit length and converted into equivalent nodal moments (MOMENT entries).
Edge Distributed Moment (m1,m2,m3)
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
2.10
Load Cases
Load cases in MSC.Patran are used to group a series of load sets into one load environment for the model. Load cases are selected when defining an analysis job. The usage within MSC . Nastran is similar. The individual load sets are translated into MSC .Nastran load sets, and the load cases are used to create the SUBCASE commands in the Case Control Section. For information on how to define multiple static and/or transient load cases, see Load Cases Application (Ch. 5) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.
MSC.Patran
2.11
Defining Contact Regions

The MSC . Nastran preference supports 3D slideline contact functionality introduced in MSC . Nastran Version 68. This capability allows the user to model contact between 2D and 3D structural regions or rigid bodies. This functionality can be accessed by using in the Loads/BCs Application in MSC.Patran. After selecting the Contact Object on the main form, the first step is to define the regions that may come into contact. Pushing the Application Region button brings up the following form. Application Region
Geometry Filter
x Geometry
Master Surface: Slave Surface:
Slide Line Slide Line
One or more curves, surface edges, or solid edges are defined for the Master and Slave application regions. The application region can only contain geometric entities. To model contact between FEM entities without associated geometry, curves must first be created from the nodes using the tools available in the Geometry application.
Active Region:
Master
Toggles the select box between Master and Slave regions. The Master and Slave application regions can be defined in either order.
Select Curves Select the curve or edge. Add Master Region Remove Adds the entities in the Select Curves databox to either the Master Region or Slave Region depending on the setting of the Active Region option menu.
Slave Region
OK
Clear
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Contact
The second step is to define a set of properties of these contacting surfaces. This is done by pushing the Input Data button on the main Application form to bring up the following subordinate form. Input Data
Penetration Type: Friction Coefficient (MU1) One Sided If the Penetration Type is One Sided, nodes in the Slave Region are not allowed to penetrate the segments of the Master Region. If Two Sided, in addition, nodes in the Master Region are not allowed to penetrate segments of the Slave Region. This is the PTYPE field on the BCONP entry. Coefficient of static friction between the two surfaces. This is the MU1 field on the BFRIC entry. FSTIF on the BFRIC entry and SFAC on the BCONP entry are penalty parameters in the contact formulation. The default values are usually adequate.
Stiffness in Stick (FSTIF)
Penalty Stiffness Scaling Factor (SFAC) 1.0 Slideline Width (W1)
Slideline Width is constant along the slideline and is used to determine the area for contact stress calculation. This is the Wi field on the BFRIC entry. A Vector Pointing from Master to Slave Surface A vector must be defined which lies in the contact plane and points from the Master region to the Slave region. This vector is used to define the coordinate system on the BCONP entry and the BLSEG entries for each region.
OK
Reset
CHAPTER
Running an Analysis
s Review of the Analysis Form s Translation Parameters s Solution Types s Direct Text Input s Solution Parameters s Subcases s Subcase Parameters s Output Requests s Select Superelements s Select Explicit MPCs... s Subcase Select s Restart Parameters s Optimize s Interactive Analysis
3.1
Review of the Analysis Form

The Analysis form appears when the Analysis toggle, located on the MSC.Patran mainform, is chosen. To run an analysis, or to create a NASTRAN input file, select Analyze as the Action on the Analysis form. Other forms brought up by the Analysis form are used to define translation parameters, solution type, solution parameters, output requests, and the load cases. These forms are described on the following pages. For further information see The Analysis Form (p. 8) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Analysis Application. MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Analysis Form
This form appears when the Analysis toggle is chosen on the main menu. When preparing for an analysis run, select Analyze as the Action.
Actions can be set to:
Analysis
Action: Object: Method: Analyze Entire Model Analysis Deck
Code: MSC.Nastran: Type: Structural
Analyze Optimize Read Output2 Read Input File Attach XDB Delete Monitor (if MSC.Patran Analysis Manager iis installed). Abort (if MSC.Patran Analysis Manager iis installed).
Available Jobs a
Indicates the selected Analysis Code and Analysis Type, as defined in the Preferences>Analysis (p. 321) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Job Name my_job Job Description MSC.Nastran job created on 01-Feb-93 at 14:32:43
List of already existing jobs. If one of these jobs is selected, the name will appear in the Job Name list box and all parameters for this job will be retrieved from the database. An existing job can be submitted again by simply selecting it and pushing Apply. It is often convenient to select an existing job, modify a few parameters and push Apply to submit the new job.
Name of job. This name will be used as the base file name for all resulting MSC.Nastran files and message files.
Translation Parameters... Solution Type... Direct Text Input... Subcases... Subcase Select... Analysis Manager...
This text is used to generate the TITLE card in the MSC.Nastran executive control section.
Opens the Direct Text Input form which allows the user to directly enter data for the BULK DATA, Case Control, Executive Control and File Management sections of the NASTRAN input file.
Open MSC.Patran Analysis Manager form.
Apply
The following table outlines the selections for the Analyze action. Object Entire Model Type Full Run Check Run Analysis Deck Model Only Full Run Check Run Analysis Deck Model Only Full Run Full Run Check Run Analysis Deck
Current Group
Existing Deck Restart
The Object indicates which part of the model is to be analyzed. There are four choices: Entire Model, Current Group, Existing Deck, and Restart.
Entire Model is the selected Object if the whole model is to be analyzed. Current Group is the selected Object if only part of the model is to be analyzed. Create
a group of that part, confirm it is the current group, then select Current Group as the Object. For more information see The Group Menu (p. 213) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Existing Deck is selected if you wish to simply submit an existing input file to
MSC.Nastran. The jobname appearing in the Job Name listbox is appended with the suffix .bdf to form the input filename. This file must reside in the current directory.
Restart is selected if you wish to restart an analysis. Currently, restarts are only
supported for the Linear Static (101), Nonlinear Static (106), and Normal Modes (103) solution types. The Restart Parameters (p. 251) form allows you to specify where to resume the analysis.
The Type indicates how far the translation is to be taken.The types are listed below: Full Run is the selected type if an Analysis Deck translation is done, and the resulting
input file is submitted to MSC.Nastran for complete analysis.
Check Run is the selected type if an Analysis Deck translation is done, and the
resulting input file is submitted to MSC.Nastran for a check run only.
Analysis Deck is the selected type if the Model Deck translation is done, plus all load
case, analysis type and analysis parameter data are translated. A complete input file, ready for MSC.Nastran should be generated.
Model Only is the selected type if a Bulk Data file is created that contains only the
model data including node, element, coordinate frame, element property, material property, and loads and boundary condition data. The translation stops at that point.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Overview of Analysis Job Definition and Submittal

To submit a single load case, linear static analysis job to MSC.Nastran it is necessary only to click the Apply button on the main Analysis form. Appropriate defaults and selections will be made automatically. Other solution types or multiple load cases will require access to one or more lower-level forms. Several different analysis examples are considered below. To perform a multiple load case, linear static analysis, it is necessary only to open the Subcase Select form. Subcases with the same names as the user-defined load case names and with appropriate defaults can be selected for inclusion in the job. If a change to one or more parameters for a subcase is desired (e.g., to change an output request), the Subcases... form must be accessed. Then it is simple to select a subcase and bring up the appropriate form (e.g., Output Requests) to make changes. For other analysis types (e.g., Normal Modes), the first step is to bring up the Solution Type form and make the appropriate selection. A lower-level Solution Parameters form can be accessed from the Solution Type form to change parameters that affect the overall analysis. Just as for the linear static case, subcases are automatically created for each defined load case. These can be selected on the Subcase Select form or modified on the Subcases form. In the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Interface, a subcase can be thought of as a MSC.Patran load case with some additional parameters (e.g., Output Requests) associated with it. This association is further strengthened since the default subcases are created for each load case and have the same name as their associated load case. In the rest of this document, the terms load case and subcase will generally be used interchangeably. When a specific form is referenced, Load case and Subcase will be capitalized.
3.2
Translation Parameters
This subordinate form appears when the Translation Parameters button is selected.
Defines type of data output. Print specifies output of data to the MSC.Nastran print file (*.f06). OP2 specifies output of data to a MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2 file (*.op2). XDB specifies output of data to a MSC.Access database (*.xdb). This is will place a PARAM, POST, -1 or PARAM, POST, 0 in the input deck for OP2 or XDB respectively. The default value can be changed in the settings.pcl file. Specifies type of OUTPUT2 commands. Alter File specifies the use of an external alter file found on the MSC.Patran file path and following the msc_v#_sol#.alt naming convention. See Files (p. 338) for more details. . P2 Built In specifies use of MSC.Nastran internal OUTPUT2 commands geared toward PATRAN 2.
Specifies format of the MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2 (*.op2) files. Use Text format when the resulting OUTPUT2 file must be transported between heterogeneous computer platforms.
Data Output Data Output: OUTPUT2 Requests: OUTPUT2 Format: Tolerances Division: Numerical: Writing: Bulk Data Format Card Format: Minimum Signif. Digits: Grid Precision Digits: Node Coordinates: MSC.Nastran Version: Number of Tasks: Write Properties on Element Entries Do not Write Continuation Markers Use Iterative Solver Numbering Options... Bulk Data Include File... either 4 6 reference frame 70.7 1.0e-08 1.0e-04 1.0e-21 XDB and Print P3 Built In Binary
P3 Built In option is appropriate only for Database Runs, see Solution Parameters (p. 183). If Database Run has been deselected, this option will be set internally to Alter File.
Defines various tolerances used during translation. 1. Division prevents divide-by-zero errors. 2. Numerical determines if two real values are equal. 3. Writing determines if a value is approximately zero when generating a Bulk Data entry field. Specifies where to round off a grid point coordinate before its written out to the bdf file. For example if this value is specified as 2 the number 1.3398 will be written out as 1.34.
Represents the number of processors to be used to run an analysis. It is assumed that the environment is configured for distributed parallel processing. For a system with multiple processors, the number of tasks must be less than or equal to the number of processors. If the number of tasks is greater than the number of processors on the system, an error is issued. The multiple systems processing is only available for IBM if the host list is provided in the working directory. The hosts can have single or multiple processors. The analysis uses one processor per machine if it can, otherwise it uses multiple processors of the systems in rotation. Cancel
OK
Defaults
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Data Output Data Output: OUTPUT2 Requests: OUTPUT2 Format: Tolerances Division: Numerical: Writing: Bulk Data Format Card Format: Minimum Signif. Digits: Grid Precision Digits: Node Coordinates: MSC.Nastran Version: Number of Tasks: Write Properties on Element Entries Do not Write Continuation Markers Use Iterative Solver Numbering Options... Bulk Data Include File... Invokes the subordinate form, Numbering Options (p. 178), which defines automatic numbering offsets and possible syntaxes for encoded IDs. either 4 6 reference frame 70.5 1.0e-08 1.0e-04 1.0e-21 XDB and Print P3 Built In Binary Defines the type of fields to be used in the Bulk Data entry. Entry format can be set to small, large, or either. If either is selected, the Minimum Significant Digits value is used to determine if the values on a particular Bulk Data entry can be placed in small fields, or if large fields are required. The small-field format consists of Bulk Data entry fields 8 columns wide, while the large field format is 16 columns wide. Determines whether the real number can be written to a standard (8 character) NASTRAN field or to a double (16 character) NASTRAN field. Defines which coordinate frame is used when generating the grid coordinates. This can be set to reference frame, analysis frame, or global. This should not affect the analysis. It only changes the method used in the grid creation. This determines which coordinate frame is referenced in the CP field of the GRID entry. Specifies the version of MSC.Nastran. The version specified here is used for two purposes: to create the full name of the ALTER file to be used, and to determine which Solution Sequence to use. Use only whole numbers and letters; for example, 66a, 67 and 68; 67.5 is the same as 67. This version number can be overridden by setting the environment variable NASTRAN_VERSION. This option is ON by default. This option can be turned OFF to write continuation markers for bulk data entries. Activates the iterative solver for analysis. The analysis manger does not support this option and must be disabled when using this option.
OK
Defaults
Cancel
Invokes the subordinate form, Select File (p. 179), which allows a file to be selected for inclusion in the Bulk Data Section of the NASTRAN input file. Specifies that properties will be written to the element cards for all elements where it is allowed in MSC.Nastran.
Numbering Options
This form is activated by the Numbering Options button on the Translation Parameters form. It allows the user to indicate offsets for all IDS to be automatically assigned during translation. For example, if the user types 100 into the Element Properties Offset box, the numbering of element properties in the resulting NASTRAN input file will begin at 101. Numbering Options
Automatic Numbering Offsets: Element Properties: Material Properties: Data Tables: Load Sets: Load Cases: Control Sets: Rigid Elements: Scalar Points: Begin. Contin. Marker: IDs Encoded in Names: Number Only Beginning Number Trailing Number Encoded Syntax Syntax Marker: . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Begin. Contin. Marker box allows the user to specify the continuation of the mnemonic format used on multiple line, Bulk Data entries. A IDs Encoded in Names allows the user to activate recognition of IDs encoded into the name of any named entity, such as a material. Number Only will recognize and use an ID if, and only if, the name of the entity is an actual number like 105. This option is ON by default. Beginning Number will recognize an ID if the number begins the name, such as 52_shell_property. This option is OFF by default. Trailing Number will recognize an ID if it trails the name, such as shell_property_52. This option is OFF by default. Encoded Syntax will recognize an ID if it directly follows the first occurrence of the specified syntax. For example, with this option activated and the specified syntax set to ., the ID assigned to a material given the name Steel_1027.32 would be 32.
OK
Defaults
Cancel
Note that both the MSC.Patran Neutral file reader and the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran input file reader preserve the IDs of named entities with a . syntax, so that a NASTRAN PSHELL record of ID 12 will be assigned the name PSHELL.12. This last option allows great continuity between input model data and output model data. This option is ON by default and the default Syntax Marker is ..
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Select File
Select File
Filter /bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/*.bdf Directories /bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/. /bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/.. /bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/clip Files ids.bdf ids_1.bdf north.bdf
Selected Input File /bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/north.bdf
OK
Filter
Cancel
3.3
Solution Types
This subordinate form appears when you select the Solution Type button on the Analysis form. Use this fom to define the type of analysis and Solution Parameters. Your choice for the Solution Type will in turn affect additional forms you complete for Solution Parameters (p. 183), Subcase Parameters (p. 214), and Output Requests (p. 231). See Table 3-1. Solution Type
MSC.Nastran Solution Type Solution Type: Linear Static selects MSC.Nastran Solution Sequence (SOL) 101, 114, 1, or 47 depending on the selected Solution Parameters. You may select one or more subcases in SOLs 1 and 101. Nonlinear Static selects Solution Sequence 66 or 106, depending on the version of MSC.Nastran. Version 66 and below yields SOL 66, and Version 67 and above yields SOL 106. You may select one or more subcases. Normal Modes selects Solution Sequence 103, 115, 3, or 48 depending on the Solution Parameters. You may select only one subcase. Complex Eigenvalue selects Solution Sequence 107, 110, 28, or 29 depending on the selected Solution Parameters. You may select only one subcase. Nonlinear Transient selects Solution Sequence 99 or 129, depending on the MSC.Nastran Version. Version 66 and below yields SOL 99; Version 67 and above yields SOL 129. You may select only one subcase. Formulation is only visible when you select Complex Eigenvalue, Frequency Response, or Transient Response. The default formulation for each is modal. Brings up a Solution-type-dependent subordinate form that allows you to specify parameters which apply to the complete solution.
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
LINEAR STATIC NONLINEAR STATIC NORMAL MODES BUCKLING COMPLEX EIGENVALUE FREQUENCY RESPONSE TRANSIENT RESPONSE NONLINEAR TRANSIENT Modal
Formulation:
Solution Parameters... Solution Sequence: 112
OK
Cancel
Transient Response selects Solution Sequence 109, 112, 27, or 31 depending on the selected Solution Parameters. You may specify only one subcase for Solution Sequences 27 or 31. For Solutions Sequences 109 or 112, multiple subcases may be selected. Frequency Response selects Solution Sequence 108, 111, 118, 26, or 30 depending on the selected Solution Parameters. You may specify only one subcase for Solution Sequences 118, 26, or 30. For Solution Sequences 108 or 111, multiple subcases may be selected. Buckling selects Solution Sequence 105, 77, or 5 depending on the selected Solution Parameters. Only one subcase may be selected that defines the static preload. The buckling subcase is automatically generated. The output requests for this Solution Type are applied to the static preload subcase. The default output requests for the buckling subcase are displacements and constraint forces.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Table 3-1 Supported MSC.Nastran Solution Sequences Solution Type Linear Static Database Run Off Off On On --Off Off On On Off On On Off Off On On Off Off On On On Off Off On On --Cyclic Symmetry Off On Off On --Off On Off On Off On Off ------Off -On ------Formulation -------------Direct Modal Direct Modal Direct Modal Direct Modal Direct Direct Modal Direct Modal --MSC.Nastran Version ----66 or Below 67 or Above --------------------66 or Below 67 or Above Solution Parameter Settings 1 47 101 114 66 106 3 48 103 115 5 77 105 28 29 107 110 26 30 108 111 118 27 31 109 112 99 129
Nonlinear Static Normal Modes
Buckling
Complex Eigenvalue
Frequency Response
Transient Response
Nonlinear Transient
3.4
Direct Text Input

This form is used to directly enter entries in the File Management, Executive Control, Case Control, and BULK DATA sections of the NASTRAN input file. The input file reader also creates these entries for any unsupported entries in the input deck. If the data is entered by the user the Write to Input Deck toggle default is ON. If the data comes from the input file reader the default for the Input Deck toggle is OFF. These entries may be reviewed and edited by the user. If they should be written to any input files subsequently created by the interface, the appropriate Write to Input Deck toggle should be set to ON. Text entered into the Case Control section is written to the input deck before the first subcase. The Direct Text Input option on the Subcases form should be used to directly enter text within a subcase definition.
Switches to determine which data section the MSC.Nastran input would be sent.
Direct Text Input

Bulk Data Section
x x x x x x x
File Management Section Executive Control Section Case Control Section Bulk Data Section
FMS Write To Input Deck EXEC Write To Input Deck CASE Write To Input Deck BULK Write To Input Deck
OK
Clear
Reset
Cancel
Saves the current setting and data for the four sections and closes the form.
Clears the current form.
Resets the form back to the data values it had at the last OK.
Resets all four forms back to its previous value and closes the form.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
3.5
Solution Parameters
Linear Static
This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type form when Linear Static is selected. Depending on the setting of the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry parameters, this Solution Type will generate a SOL 101, 114, 1, or 47 input file.
Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOL 101 or 114) is to be used or a Rigid Format (SOL 1 or 47). If selected, a Structured Solution Sequence is selected.
Solution Parameters
Static Solution Parameters Database Run Cyclic Symmetry Automatic Constraints Inertia Relief Alternate Reduction Shell Normal Tol. Angle = Mass Calculation: Data Deck Echo: Plate Rz Stiffness Factor = Maximum Printed Lines = Maximum Run Time = Wt.-Mass Conversion = Node i.d. for Wt. Gener. = Max p-Adaptive Cycles = 3 0.0 500000 10 1.0 Lumped None Indicates that the inertia relief flags are to be set by including the PARAM, INREL,-1 command. This flag can only be chosen if Database Run is selected and Cyclic Symmetry is disabled. If inertia relief is selected, a node-ID for weight generation must be selected. A PARAM, GRDPNT and a SUPORT command will be written to the input file using the same node-ID selected for weight generation. The SUPORT card will specify all 6 degrees of freedom. Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MSC.Nastran will automatically constrain model singularities. Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part (SOL 114 or 47).
OK
Defaults
Cancel
Indicates that an alternate method of performing the static condensation is desired. The PARAM, ALTRED,YES command is included if selected and if Database Run is also selected.
The table outlines the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry selections, and the SOL types that will be used. Database Run On On Off Off Cyclic Symmetry Off On Off On SOL 101 114 1 47
This is a list of the data input available for defining the Static Solution Parameters that were not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Shell Normal Tolerance Angle Mass Calculation Description Indicates that MSC.Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry. Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MSC.Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1; otherwise, it will be set to Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within -1. Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MSC.Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None. Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis. Limits the size of the MSC.Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the setting of the MAXLINES case control command. Limits the amount of CPU time, expressed in CPU minutes, that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME executive control statement. Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter.
Data Deck Echo
Plate Rz Stiffness Factor
Maximum Printed Lines
Maximum Run Time
Wt-Mass Conversion
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Parameter Name Node ID for Wt. Gener. Max p-Adaptive Cycles
Description Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is the GRDPNT parameter. For p-element analysis, this is the maximum number of adaptive analysis that will be performed. If the adaptive analysis converges before this number of cycles is reached, the run will terminate normally.
Nonlinear Static
This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type form, when Nonlinear Static is selected. If the MSC.Nastran version specified is Version 66 or lower, then Solution Sequence (SOL) 66 will be employed. However, if the MSC.Nastran version specified is version 67 or higher, then Solution Sequence 106 will be employed. For more information about specification of the MSC.Nastran version number, see the Translation Parameters (p. 176) form.
Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested. MSC.Nastran will automatically constrain model singularities.
Solution Parameters
Nonlinear Static Solution Parameters Automatic Constraints Large Displacements Follower Forces Mass Calculation: Data Deck Echo: Plate Rz Stiffness Factor = Maximum Printed Lines = Maximum Run Time = Wt.-Mass Conversion = Node i.d. for Wt. Gener. = Coupled None 100.0 500000 10 1.0 Indicates that displacements, which can cause a difference in the formulation of the stiffness matrix, may be encountered. Therefore, the stiffness matrix may need to be periodically recomputed based on the displaced shape. Indicates, as the part deflects, that the applied forces will remain aligned with the deformed part rather than maintaining their global orientation. This can only be selected if Large Displacements is also selected.
OK
Defaults
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
The following table outlines the selections for Large Displacements and Follower Forces, and the altered LGDISP parameter setting for each. Large Displacements Off On On Follower Forces On On Off LGDISP
-1
1 2
This is a list of the data input, available for defining the Nonlinear Static Solution Parameters, that were not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Mass Calculation Description Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MSC.Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1. Indicates how the data file entry card images are to be printed in the MSC.Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None. Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis. Limits the size of the MSC.Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command. Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement. Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is the GRDPNT parameter.
Data Deck Echo
Maximum Run Time
Wt-Mass Conversion Node ID for Wt. Gener.
Normal Modes
This subordinate form appears whenever the Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when Normal Modes is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 103, 115, 3, or 48 input file, depending on the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry parameters below.
Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 103 or 115) is to be used or a Rigid Format (SOL 3 or 48). If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence will be selected.
Solution Parameters
Static Solution Parameters Database Run Cyclic Symmetry Automatic Constraints Shell Normal Tol. Angle = Mass Calculation: Data Deck Echo: Plate Rz Stiffness Factor = Maximum Printed Lines = Maximum Run Time = Wt.-Mass Conversion = Node i.d. for Wt. Gener. = Max p-Adaptive Cycles = 3 See Real Eigenvalue Extraction (p. 191). If the version is Version 68 and the solution sequence is SOL 103, then these controls are selectable on the Normal Modes Subcase Parameters (p. 221) form. See Dynamic Reduction Parameters (p. 193). OK Defaults Cancel Lumped None 0.0 500000 10 1.0 Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part (SOL 115 or 48). Indicates that an AUTOSPC card is requested, so that MSC.Nastran will automatically constrain model singularities.
Eigenvalue Extraction... Dynamic Reduction...
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry, and the altered SOL type for each. Database Run On On Off Off Cyclic Symmetry Off On Off On SOL 103 115 3 48
This is a list of data input, available for defining the Normal Modes Solution Parameters, that were not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Shell Normal Tolerance Angle Mass Calculation Description Indicates that MSC.Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry. Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MSC.Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1. Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MSC.Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None. Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis. Limits the size of the MSC.Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command. Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run (used to prevent runaway jobs). This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement. Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is the GRDPNT parameter. Brings up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the eigenvalue extraction controls. If the version is 68 and the solution sequence is SOL 103, then these controls are selectable at the subcase level. Brings up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form for defining the dynamic reduction controls.
Data Deck Echo
Maximum Run Time
Wt-Mass Conversion Node ID for Wt. Gener. Eigenvalue Extraction
Dynamic Reduction
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Real Eigenvalue Extraction This subordinate form appears when the Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Normal Modes, Frequency Response, or Transient Response Solution Parameters forms. It also appears when the Real Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameter form. Use this form to create either EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.
Defines the method to use to extract the real eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one of the following: Lanczos, Automatic Givens, Automatic Householder, Modified Givens, Modified Householder, Givens, Householder, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If this selection is set to Lanczos, an EIGRL Bulk Data entry should be created. Otherwise, this defines the setting of the METHOD field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
Eigenvalue Extraction
REAL EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION Extraction Method: Lanczos
Frequency Range of Interest Lower = Upper = Estimated Number of Roots = 100 Number of Desired Roots = 10 Diagnostic Output Level: Results Normalization Normalization Method: Normalization Point = Normalization Component: 1 Mass 0 Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be located. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Enhanced Inverse Power or Inverse Power. This is the NE field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry. Defines the lower and upper limits to the range of frequencies to be examined. These are the F1 and F2 fields on the EIGR Bulk Data entry or the V1 and V2 fields on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.
OK
Cancel
This is a list of data input available for defining the Real Eigenvalue Extraction that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Number of Desired Roots Diagnostic Output Level Description Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed. This is the ND field on the EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries. Defines the level of desired output. This can take any integer value between 0 and 3. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry. Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This parameter can take one of three settings: Mass, Maximum, or Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. Defines the setting of the NORM field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry. Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
Normalization Method
Normalization Point
Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point to be used. This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the C field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Dynamic Reduction Parameters This subordinate form appears when the Dynamic Reduction button is selected on the Normal Modes, Complex Eigenvalue, Frequency Response, or Transient Response Solution Parameters forms. Use this form to create the DYNRED Bulk Data entry. Dynamic Reduction
Dynamic Reduction Parameters: Perform Dynamic Reduction Highest Frequency of Interest = 250 Method: Automatic Indicates the maximum frequency to be considered when performing dynamic reduction. This parameter can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set to ON. This is the FMAX field.
A flag that indicates whether or not any dynamic reduction is desired.
Number of Generalized Coordinates = 100 Number of Needed Scalar Points = 100 Indicates which method is to be used in selecting coordinates. This parameter can be set to either Automatic or Manual. This parameter can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set to ON. This determines if the program will automatically select the number of generalized coordinates.
OK
Cancel
Indicates the number of scalar points that must be retained in this dynamic reduction. This parameter can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set to ON and Method of Coordinate Selection is set to Manual. The Application Preference will automatically create this many SPOINTs, and place them in the aset and the q-set. Defines the number of generalized coordinates to be included in the dynamic reduction. This parameter can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set to ON, and Method of Coordinate Selection is set to Manual. This is the NQDES field.
Buckling
This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when Buckling is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 105, 77, or 5 input file, depending on the setting of the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry parameters.
Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MSC.Nastran will automatically constrain model singularities.
Solution Parameters
Buckling Solution Parameters Database Run Cyclic Symmetry Automatic Constraints Mass Calculation: Data Deck Echo: Plate Rz Stiffness Factor = Maximum Printed Lines = Maximum Run Time = Wt.-Mass Conversion = Node i.d. for Wt. Gener. = Eigenvalue Extraction... See Real Eigenvalue Extraction (p. 191). Coupled None 0.0 500000 10 1.0 Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part. Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOL 105) is to be used or a Rigid Format or unstructured Solution Sequence (SOL 5 or 77). If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence will be selected.
OK
Defaults
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry, and the altered SOL type for each. Database Run On On Off Cyclic Symmetry Off On Off SOL 105 77 5
This is a list of data input available for defining the Buckling Solution Parameters that were not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Mass Calculation Description Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MSC.Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1. Indicates how the data deck card images are to be printed in the MSC.Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None. Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis. Limits the size of the MSC.Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command. Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement. Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is the GRDPNT parameter. Brings up the Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the eigenvalue extraction controls.
Data Deck Echo
Maximum Run Time
Wt-Mass Conversion Node ID for Wt. Gener. Eigenvalue Extraction
Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction This subordinate form appears when the Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Buckling Solution Parameters form. Use this form to create either EIGB or EIGRL Bulk Data entries, depending on the selected extraction method.
Defines the method to use to extract the buckling eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one of the following: Lanczos, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If Lanczos is selected, an EIGRL entry will be created. If Inverse Power or Enhanced Inverse Power are selected, and EIGB entry will be created with the METHOD field set to either INV or SINV specified, respectively.
Eigenvalue Extraction
BUCKLING EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION Extraction Method: Lanczos Defines the lower and upper limits to the range of eigenvalues to be examined. These are the L1 and L2 fields on the EIGB entry or the V1 and V2 fields on the EIGRL entry.
Eigenvalue Range of Interest Lower = Upper = Estimated Number of Roots = 2 Number of Desired Roots = 1 Number of Desired Positive Roots = 1 Number of Desired Negative Roots = 1 Diagnostic Output Level: Results Normalization Normalization Method: Normalization Point = Normalization Component: 1 Maximum 0
Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be located. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power. This is the NEP field on the EIGB entry.
Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed. This value can only be selected if Extraction Methods set to Lanczos. This is the NP field on the EIGRL entry.
OK
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
This is a list of data input, available for defining the Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction, that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Description
Number of Desired Positive Indicates the limit to how many positive eigenvalues to be Roots computed. This value can only be selected if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power or Enhanced Inverse Power. This is the NDP field on the EIGB entry. Number of Desired Negative Roots Indicates the limit to how many negative eigenvalues to be computed. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power or Enhanced Inverse Power. This is the NDN field on the EIGB entry. Defines the level of desired output. This can take any integer value in the range of 0 through 3. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry. Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This parameter can take one of two settings: Maximum or Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the NORM field on the EIGB entry. Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGB entry.
Diagnostic Output Level
Normalization Point
Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point to be used. This, too, can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the C field on the EIGB entry.
Complex Eigenvalue
This subordinate form appears when you select Solution Parameters/Complex Eigenvalue on the Solution Type form. When you specify the Database Run and Formulation parameters (from the Solution Type form), MSC.Patran generates a SOL 107, 110, 28, or 29 input file.
If you select Database Run, a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 107 or 110) will be selected. If you deselect Database Run a Rigid Format Solution Sequence (SOLs 28 or 29) will be selected.
Solution Parameters
Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameters Database Run Automatic Constraints Shell Normal Tol. Angle = Mass Calculation: Data Deck Echo: Plate Rz Stiffness Factor = Maximum Printed Lines = Maximum Run Time = Wt.-Mass Conversion = Node i.d. for Wt. Gener. = Struct. Damping Coeff. = Complex Eigenvalue... Real Eigenvalue... Dynamic Reduction... See Dynamic Reduction Parameters (p. 193). See Complex Eigenvalue Extraction (p. 201). See Real Eigenvalue Extraction (p. 191). Lumped None 0.0 999999999 600 1.0 Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MSC.Nastran will constrain model singularities.
OK
Defaults
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Formulation, and the altered SOL type for each. Database Run On On Off Off Formulation Direct Modal Direct Modal SOL 107 110 28 29
This is a list of data input available for defining the Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameters that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Shell Normal Tolerance Angle Mass Calculation Description Indicates that MSC.Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry. Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MSC.Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1. Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MSC.Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None. Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis. Limits the size of the MSC.Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command. Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement. Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is the GRDPNT parameter. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e.g., PARAM, G, value).
Data Deck Echo
Maximum Run Time
Wt-Mass Conversion Node ID for Wt. Gener. Struct. Damping Coeff.
Parameter Name Complex Eigenvalue Real Eigenvalue Dynamic Reduction
Description Brings up the Complex Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the complex eigenvalue extraction controls. Brings up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the real eigenvalue extraction controls. Brings up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form for defining the dynamic reduction controls.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Complex Eigenvalue Extraction This subordinate form appears when the Complex Eigenvalue button is selected on the Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameters form. Use this form to create an EIGC Bulk Data entry. Eigenvalue Extraction
COMPLEX EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION Extraction Method: Search Region Alpha of Point A = Omega of Point A = Alpha of Point B = Omega of Point B = Width of Region = Estimated Number of Roots = 50 Number of Desired Roots = 10 Results Normalization Normalization Method: Normalization Point = Normalization Component: 1 Maximum 0 0 10 10 1 Defines the real component of the end of lines in the complex plane. These values cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the ALPHABJ fields. Complex Lanczos Defines the method to use to extract the complex eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one of the following: Complex Lanczos, Upper Hessenberg, Inverse Power, or Determinate. This defines the setting of the METHOD field. Defines the real component of the beginning of lines in the complex plane. These values cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the ALPHAAJ fields.
OK
Cancel
Defines the imaginary component of the beginning of lines in the complex plane. These values cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the OMEGAAJ fields.
This is a list of data input available for defining the Complex Eigenvalue Extraction that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Omega of B Points Description Defines the imaginary component of the end of lines in the complex plane. These values cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the OMEGABJ fields. Defines the width of the region in the complex plane. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the LJ fields. Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be located within the specified region. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of integer values. They are the NEJ fields. Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed within the specified region. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of integer values. They are the NDJ fields. Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This parameter can take one of two settings: Maximum or Point. This is the NORM field on the EIGC entry. Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This is the G field on the EIGC bulk data entry.
Width of Regions
Estimated Number of Roots
Number of Desired Roots
Normalization Point
Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point to be used. This can only be selected if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power or Determinate. This is the C field on the EIGC Bulk Data entry.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Frequency Response
This subordinate form appears when you select Solution Parameters/Frequency Response on the Solution Type form. MSC.Patran generates a SOL 108, 111, 118, 26, or 30 input file when you specify the Database Run, Cyclic Symmetry, and Formulation parameters (from the Solution Type form).
If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 108, 111, 118) will be selected. If Database Run is deselected, a Rigid Format (SOLs 26 or 30) will be selected.
Solution Parameters
Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameters Database Run Cyclic Symmetry Automatic Constraints Residual Vector Computation Shell Normal Tol. Angle = Mass Calculation: Data Deck Echo: Plate Rz Stiffness Factor = Maximum Printed Lines = Maximum Run Time = Wt.-Mass Conversion = Node i.d. for Wt. Gener. = Struct. Damping Coeff. = Eigenvalue Extraction... Dynamic Reduction... See Real Eigenvalue Extraction (p. 191). See Dynamic Reduction Parameters (p. 193). Cancel Coupled None 0.0 500000 10 1.0 Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part, and the appropriate flags will be set. This can only be set if Database Run is selected and Formulation is set to Direct (SOL 118). Residual Vector Computation requests the computation of residual vectors from applied loads. By default the residual vectors are not computed.
OK
Defaults
The following table outlines the selections for Database Run, Formulation, and Cyclic Symmetry parameters, and the altered SOL type for each. Database Run On On On Off Off Formulation Direct Direct Modal Direct Modal Cyclic Symmetry Off On ---SOL 108 118 111 26 30
This is a list of data input, available for defining the Frequency Response Solution Parameters that were not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Shell Normal Tolerance Angle Automatic Constraints Mass Calculation Description Indicates that MSC.Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry. Indicates that an AUTOSPC card is requested, so that MSC.Nastran will constrain model singularities. Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MSC.Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1. Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MSC.Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None. Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis. Limits the size of the MSC.Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command. Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement. Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter.
Data Deck Echo
Maximum Run Time
Wt-Mass Conversion
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Parameter Name Node ID for Wt. Gener. Struct. Damping Coeff. Eigenvalue Extraction
Description Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is the GRDPNT parameter. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e.g., PARAM, G, value). Calls up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form that is used to define the eigenvalue extraction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to Modal. Calls up another form that is used to define the dynamic reduction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to Modal.
Dynamic Reduction
Transient Response
This subordinate form appears when you select Solution Parameters/Tranisent Response on the Solution Type form. MSC.Patran generates a SOL 109, 112, 27, or 31 input file, when you specify Database Run and Formulation parameters (from the Solution Type form). Solution Parameters
Transient Solution Parameters Database Run Automatic Constraints Residual Vector Computation Shell Normal Tol. Angle = Mass Calculation: Data Deck Echo: Plate Rz Stiffness Factor = Maximum Printed Lines = Maximum Run Time = Wt.-Mass Conversion = Node i.d. for Wt. Gener. = Struct. Damping Coeff. = W3, Damping Factor = W4, Damping Factor = Eigenvalue Extraction... Dynamic Reduction... These options are only available for a "Modal" solution. OK Defaults Cancel Lumped None 0.0 999999999 600 1.0 If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 109, 112) will be selected. If Database Run is deselected, a Rigid Format (SOLs 27 or 31) will be selected. Residual Vector Computation requests the computation of residual vectors from applied loads. By default the residual vectors are not computed.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Formulation, and the altered SOL type for each. Database Run On On Off Off Formulation Direct Modal Direct Modal SOL 109 112 27 31
This is a list of data input available for defining the Transient Solution Parameters that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Shell Normal Tolerance Angle Automatic Constraints Mass Calculation Description Indicates that MSC.Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry. Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MSC.Nastran will constrain model singularities. Defines how the mass matrix will be treated within MSC.Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1. Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MSC.Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None. Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis. Limits the size of the MSC.Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command. Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement. Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is the GRDPNT parameter.
Data Deck Echo
Maximum Run Time
Wt-Mass Conversion Node ID for Wt. Gener.
Parameter Name Struct. Damping Coeff. W3, Damping Factor W4, Damping Factor1 Eigenvalue Extraction
Description Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e.g., PARAM, G, value.) Defines W3 and W4 parameters. These parameters alter the damping characteristics of the model. Calls up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form that is used to define the eigenvalue extraction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to Modal. Calls up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form that is used to define the dynamic reduction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to Modal.
Dynamic Reduction
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Nonlinear Transient
This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type form when Nonlinear Transient is selected. Use this form to generate either a SOL 99 or a SOL 129 input file, depending on the version of MSC.Nastran indicated on the translation parameter form. Version 66 and below yields SOL 99 and Version 67 and above yields SOL 129.
Indicates that an AUTOSPC card is requested, so that MSC.Nastran will constrain model singularities.
Solution Parameters
Nonlinear Transient Solution Parameters Automatic Constraints Large Displacements Follower Forces Mass Calculation: Data Deck Echo: Plate Rz Stiffness Factor = Maximum Printed Lines = Maximum Run Time = Wt.-Mass Conversion = Node i.d. for Wt. Gener. = Struct. Damping Coeff. = W3, Damping Factor = W4, Damping Factor = Coupled None 100.0 500000 10 1.0 Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in theMSC.Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None. Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MSC.Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1.
OK
Defaults
Cancel
This is a list of data input available for defining the Nonlinear Transient Solution Parameters that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Description Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis. Limits the size of the MSC.Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command. Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement. Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is the GRDPNT parameter. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e.g., PARAM, G, value.) Define W3 and W4 parameters. These parameters alter the damping characteristics of the model.
Maximum Run Time
Wt-Mass Conversion Node ID for Wt. Gener. Struct. Damping Coeff. W3, Damping Factor W4, Damping Factor
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
3.6
Subcases
This form appears when the Subcases button is selected on the Analysis form. The subcase is the MSC.Nastran mechanism for associating loads and boundary conditions, output requests, and various other parameters to be used during part of a complete run. In runs involving superelements, operations on specific superelements can be carried out in different subcases. The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface automatically associates default parameters and output requests with each MSC.Patran load case to create a subcase with the same name as the load case. You can access the Subcase Parameters and Output Requests forms to view or modify these defaults. You can access the Select Superelements form to include already-created superelements in this analysis job.
Subcases
Solution Sequence: 101 Action Create
Options are Create, Delete, and Global Data.
Available Subcases Default Second-Load-Case Pressure-Case 3-g-Pullup
Displays all the available subcases associated with the current Solution Sequence.
Subcase Name Default Subcase Description This is the default subcase
The subcase name that is being created or modified is displayed in this databox. It can be typed in or picked from the Available Subcases listbox. Displays the description of the current subcase. The description can be 256 characters long. This is used to generate the SUBTITLE entry.
Available Load Cases Default Second-Load-Case Pressure-Case 3-g-Pullup
Subcase Options Subcase Parameters... Output Requests... Direct Text Input... Select Superelements... Select Explicit MPCs...
Displays all the available loadcases in the current database. Only one loadcase can be selected per subcase. For Normal Modes and Complex Eigenvalue solution types, free-free runs can be generated by using an empty load case.
Apply
Cancel
Deleting Subcases
To delete subcases, select Subcases from the Analysis form, and set the Action to Delete.
Subcases
Solution Sequence: 101 Action Delete
Select Subcases Default Second-Load-Case Pressure-Case 3-g-Pullup
Select the subcase(s) to delete.
Apply to delete the selected subcases.
Apply
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Editing Subcases
To edit global data for subcases, select Subcases from the Analysis form, and set the Action to Global Data. The following form appears.
Subcases
Solution Sequence: 101 Action Global Data
Select Subcases Default Second-Load-Case Pressure-Case 3-g-Pullup
Select Subcase(s) to edit associated data.
Subcase Options Output Requests...
Use Output Requests... to edit the output Use to the output requests associated with the selected requests with selected subcases. The Edit Output Request form subcases. The Edit Output form appears. See Edit Output Requests Form (p. 242). Apply changes the output requests for all selected subcases. Cancel closes the form without changes.
Apply
Cancel
3.7
Subcase Parameters
The subcase parameters represent the settings in MSC.Nastran Case Control that take effect within a subcase and do not affect the analysis in other subcases. Currently, the following solution sequences have subcase parameters associated with them. Solution Sequences Linear Static Subcase Parameters (p. 215) SOL 101 Other Conditions Model has p-elements and utilizes Version 68 Description Selects the subcase to participate in the error analysis calculations in an adaptive analysis. By default the subcase participates in the error analysis. Selects nonlinear static iteration parameters. Selects nonlinear transient iteration parameters. Selects real eigenvalue extraction parameters.
Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters (p. 216) SOL 106, 66 Subcases Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters (p. 219) SOL 129, 99 Normal Modes Subcase Parameters (p. 221) SOL 103
None
None
Version 68
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Linear Static Subcase Parameters

This form is available for solution sequence 101 for MSC.Nastran Version 68 and for models that contain p-elements. The form allows the inclusion of subcases in the error analysis. This toggle sets the ADACT Case Control command. Subcase Parameters
Perform Error Analysis
OK
Cancel
Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters button is selected on the Subcases form when the solution type is Nonlinear Static. This form allows the definition of the parameters that control the interation criteria for a Nonlinear Static analysis. All of the data is part of the NLPARM Bulk Data entry. If Arc-Length Method is selected, additional data for the NLPCI bulk data entry is generated.
Defines the number of increments to be used to apply the full load. This is the NINC field.
Subcase Parameters
Static Nonlinear Iterations Number of Load Increments = Matrix Update Method: Number of Iterations per Update = Allowable Iterations per Increment = Convergence Criteria Displacement Error Displacement Tolerance = Load Error Load Tolerance = Work Error Work Tolerance = 0.01 0.01 1.0e-03 Defines the limit for the number of iterations that can be done in any given increment. This is the MAXITER field. Automatic 5 25 Defines the number of iterations to be used after each matrix update. This is the KSTEP field. 10 Defines what method to use to control the stiffness. Matrix updates as the load is incrementally applied. This parameter can have one of three settings: Automatic, Semi-Automatic, or Controlled Iter. This defines the setting of the KMETHOD field.
Arc-Length Method ... Normal Modes Normal Modes Buckling Buckling
Opens a subordinate form to activate the Arc-Length Method which is turned OFF by default. The Arc-Length Method is used to explore post-buckling paths. Activates a buckling analysis at the end of the subcase.
OK
Cancel
Opens subordinate form to define eigenvalue extraction parameters.
Activates a normal mode analysis of the prestressed system at the end of the subcase.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
This is a list of data input available for defining the Static Nonlinear Iterations that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Displacement Error Displacement Tolerance Description Indicates whether a displacement convergence criteria should be used. If Displacement Error is selected, the Displacement Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance on displacements. The displacement tolerance must be met between iterations to define convergence. If Displacement Error is selected, a U is entered in the CONV field. The Displacement Tolerance is the EPSU field. Indicates whether a load convergence criteria should be used. If Load Error is selected, the Load Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance on load equilibrium. The load equilibrium tolerance must be met between iterations to define convergence. If Load Error is selected, a P is entered in the CONV field. Load Tolerance is the EPSP field. Indicates whether a work convergence criteria should be used. If Work Error is selected, the Work Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance on work error. The work tolerance must be met between iterations to define convergence. If Work Error is selected, a W is entered in the CONV field. Work Tolerance is the EPSW field.
Load Error Load Tolerance
Work Error Work Tolerance
Arc-Length Method Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Arc-Length Method button is selected on the Subcase Parameters form. This form allows the definition of parameters that control the Arc-Length Method. All of the data is part of the NLPCI bulk data entry.
Defines the type of Arc-Length Method:
Arc-Length Method Parameters

Use Arc-Length Method Constraint type: Min. Adjust. ratio (MINALR) = Max. Adjust. ratio (MAXALR) = Scale Facter (W) = Convergence Iterations = Max. controlled Increment Steps = CRIS 0.25 4.00 0.0 12 20
CRIS = Crisfield method (default) RIKS = Riks method MRIKS = modified Riks method Minimum allowable arc-length adjustment ratio between increments for the adaptive arc-length method 0.0MINALR1.0. Maximum allowable arc-length adjustment ratio between increments for the adaptive arc-length method MAXALR1.0. Scale factor w for arc-length criteria: w=0, displacement control w>0, combined load and displacements control w1, load control
OK
Defaults
Cancel
Maximum number of controlled increment steps allowed within the subcase. This is the MXINC field.
Desired number of iterations for convergence to be used for the adaptive arc-length adjustments. This is the DESITER field
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Subcases Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters button is selected on the Subcases form when the solution type is Nonlinear Transient. All of the data is part of the TSTEPNL Bulk Data entry. Subcase Parameters
Ending Time = Number of Time Steps = Transient Nonlinear Iterations Matrix Update Method: Static Solution Number of Time Steps per Update = 2 Number of Bisections per Update = 2 Allowable Iterations per Time Step = 10 Defines the limit for the number of iterations that can be done in any given increment. This is the MAXITER field. Defines the number of time steps to be used in each matrix update. This can only be set if Matrix Update Method is set to Time Step. This is the NDT field. Adaptive
1.0 100
Defines the Ending Time and Number of Time Steps for the subcase. Defines what method to use to control the stiffness. The Mass matrix updates as the load is incrementally applied. This parameter can have one of three settings: Adaptive, Automatic, or Time Step. This is the METHOD field.
Convergence Criteria Displacement Error Displacement Tolerance = Load Error Load Tolerance = Work Error Work Tolerance = Exit on Failure to Converge 1.0e-06 1.0e-03 1.0e-02
OK
Cancel
Defines the maximum number of time step bisections to be used in each matrix update. This can only be set if Matrix Update Method is set to Adaptive. This is the MAXBIS field.
This is a list of data input available for defining the Transient Nonlinear Iterations that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Displacement Error Displacement Tolerance Description Indicates whether a displacement convergence criteria should be used. If Displacement Error is selected, the Displacement Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance on displacements that must be met between interactions to define convergence. If Displacement Error is selected, a U is entered in the CONV field. The Displacement Tolerance is the EPSU field. Indicates whether a load convergence criteria should be used. If Load Error is selected, the Load Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance on load equilibrium that must be met between iterations to define convergence. If Load Error is selected, a P is entered in the CONV field. Load Tolerance is the EPSP field. Indicates whether a work convergence criteria should be used. If Work Error is selected, the Work Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance on work error that must be met between iterations to define convergence. If Work Error is selected, a W is entered in the CONV field. Work Tolerance is the EPSW field.
Load Error Load Tolerance
Work Error Work Tolerance
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Normal Modes Subcase Parameters

The Normal Modes subcase parameters form is available only for Solution 106 for MSC.Nastran Version 70.7. Use this form to create either EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.
Defines the method to use to extract the real eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one of the following: Lanczos, Automatic Givens, Automatic Householder, Modified Givens, Modified Householder, Givens, Householder, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If this is set to Lanczos, this indicates that an EIGRL Bulk Data entry should be created. Otherwise, this defines the setting of the METHOD field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
Subcase Parameters
REAL EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION Lanczos
Extraction Method: Frequency Range of Interest Lower = Upper =
Defines the lower and upper limits to the range of frequencies to be examined. These are the F1 and F2 fields on the EIGR Bulk Data entry or the V1 and V2 fields on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry. 100 10 0
Estimated Number of Roots = Number of Desired Roots = Diagnostic Output Level: Results Normalization Normalization Method: Normalization Point = Normalization Component: Number of Modes in Error Analysis = 10 Dynamic Reduction... 1
Mass
Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be located. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Enhanced Inverse Power or Inverse Power. This is the NE field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
See Dynamic Reduction Parameters (p. 193).
OK
Cancel
This is a list of data input available for defining the Real Eigenvalue Extraction that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Number of Desired Roots Diagnostic Output Level Description Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed. This is the ND field on the EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries. Defines the level of desired output. This can take any integer value between 0 and 3. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry. Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This parameter can take one of three settings: Mass, Maximum, or Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. Defines the setting of the NORM field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry. Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
Normalization Point
Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point to be used. This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the C field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry. Number of Modes in Error Indicates how many modes will participate in the error analysis Analysis when the model contains p-elements. This data sets the ADACT Case Control command.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Transient Response Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when you select Subcase Parameters button on the Subcases form and the solution type is Transient Response. Use this form to specify the time step interval and duration for a transient response analysis. All of the data is part of the TSTEP Bulk Data entry. Direct Transient Solution Subcase Parameters
TRANSIENT RESPONSE SOLUTION PARAMETERS Time Recovery Points DEFINE TIME STEPS... Use this button to define your TSTEP entry.
OK
Cancel
Modal Transient Solution This is the subcase Parameters form for a Modal Transient solution. Subcase Parameters
TRANSIENT RESPONSE SOLUTION PARAMETERS Time Recovery Points DEFINE TIME STEPS... Use this button to define your TSTEP entry.
Modal Damping
None Use this button to define your TABDMP1 entry. You must enter at least one value of frequency and damping on the spreadsheet for damping to occur. Cancel
DEFINE MODAL DAMPING...
OK
Defaults
Define Time Step Use this form to define the time steps in a linear table. Values of Delta-T (Time Increment) must be positive. See "MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide" TSTEP for more information. Define Time Step
Input Data The "Skip Factor" column is optional. If the column is empty, MSC.Nastran assumes the Skip Factor is 1.
No. of Time Steps 1 100 1.
Delta-T
Skip Factor
2 3 4 5 6 7
Add Row
Clear All
Delete Row
OK
Defaults
Cancel
"Add Row" adds a row after the selected row. To insert a row at the beginning of the table, select click on the row label and select "Add Row".
No. of Time Steps and Delta-T determine the solution points in time. The skip factor defines which of the solution points you wish to perform results processing on. A skip factor of 1 indicates every time step, 2 indicates every other solution step, etc. Total solution time accumulates in order of entry. For the example shown, MSC.Nastran will calculate output at 100 time steps ranging between 1. and 100.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Define Damping Use this form to define Damping in a linear table. Values of frequency must be positive. Discontinuities (same value of frequency, different value of damping) are allowed at all locations except the first and last entries in the table. See "MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide" TABDMP1 for more information. Modal Damping does not allow a discontinuity to exist as either the first or last entries in the modal damping data. This will cause an error in MSC.Nastran. It is strongly recommended that you do not create such scenario. If the first and second frequencies (two lowest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping value for those frequencies are the same. If the last and second to last frequencies (two highest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping value for those frequencies are the same. Define Damping
Input Data
Frequency 1
Value
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
"Add Row" adds a row after the selected row. To insert a row at the beginning of the table, click on the row label and select "Add Row".
Add Row
Clear All
Delete Row
OK
Cancel
Frequency Response Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when you select the Subcase Parameters button on the Subcases form and the solution type is Frequency Response. Use this form to specify the frequencies for a frequency response analysis. All of the data is part of a FREQi Bulk Data entry. Direct Frequency Solution This is the Direct Frequency Subcase Parameter Form. Subcase Parameters
FREQUENCY RESPONSE SOLUTION PARAMETERS FREQUENCY RECOVERY POINTS DEFINE FREQUENCIES... Use this button to define frequencies.
OK
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Use this form to create FREQi entries. Define Frequencies

Type: Logarithmic Input Data 0.
Start Freq. 1 0.
End Freq. 250.
No. Incr. 100
Incr. Type Logarithmic
Add Row
Clear All
Delete Row
OK
Defaults
Cancel
The driving column on this form is the Increment type. When the Increment type is... Discrete
MSC.Patran... Creates a FREQ entry where Start Freq is the frequency value. Multiple Discrete rows will be written to the same FREQ card. End Freq. and No. Incr. columns are not used. Creates a FREQ1 entry. The Start Freq. will be the first frequency and the End Freq. and No. Increments will have a linear progression in between. Creates a FREQ2. Same as Linear, except it will have a logarithmic progression.
Linear
Logarithmic
Modal Frequency Solution This is the subcase Parameters form for a Modal Frequency solution. Subcase Parameters
FREQUENCY RESPONSE SOLUTION PARAMETERS FREQUENCY RECOVERY POINTS DEFINE FREQUENCIES... Use this button to define FREQ,FREQ1,FREQ2,FREQ3, FREQ4 entries.
Modal Damping
None Use this button to define a TABDMP1 entry. At least one value of frequency and damping must be entered on the spreadsheet for damping to occur. Cancel
DEFINE MODAL DAMPING...
OK
Defaults
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Define Frequencies Use this form to create FREQi entries. Define Frequencies
Type: Logarithmic End Freq. 250. Input Data No. Incr. 100 0. Incr. Type Logarithmic Cluster/Spread
Start Freq. 1 0.01
Add Row
Clear All
Delete Row
OK
Defaults
Cancel
The driving column on this form is the Increment type. When the Increment Type is... Discrete
MSC.Patran... Creates a FREQ entry where Start Freq is the frequency value. Multiple Discrete rows will be written to the same FREQ card. End Freq, No. Incr. and Cluster/Spread columns are not used. Creates a FREQ1 entry. The Start Freq. will be the first frequency and the End Freq. and No. Increments will have a linear progression in between. The Cluster/Spread column is not used. Creates a FREQ2. Same as Linear, except it will have a logarithmic progression. Creates a FREQ3 with type set to LINEAR. This results in a linear distribution of solution frequencies between each successive pair of natural modes in the specified frequency interval. The Cluster value, which has a default of 1.0 is used to bias the linear distribution of solution frequencies. A smaller cluster value has a closer spacing towards the center, CLUSTER greater than 1.0 has a closer spacing at the ends of the frequency range.
Linear
Logarithmic Lin. Cluster
Log. Cluster Spread
Same as Lin. Cluster except that a logarithmic interpolation is used between the start and end frequencies. Creates a FREQ4 entry. The default value of spread is 0.1. The spread is a fractional amount specified for each mode. With a spread of 0.3 and No. Incr. of 21, there will be 21 evenly spaced frequencies between 0.7*FN and 1.3*FN, where FN a natural frequency, for all natural frequencies between the specified Start Freq and End Freq values.
Define Damping Use this form to define the damping in a linear table. Values of frequency must be positive. Discontinuities (same value of frequency, different value of damping) are allowed at all locations except the first and last entries in the table. See "MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide" TABDMP1 for more information. Modal Damping does not allow a discontinuity to exist as either the first or last entry in the modal damping data. This will cause an error in MSC.Nastran. It is strongly recommended that you do not create such scenario. If the first and second frequencies (two lowest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping values for those frequencies are the same. If the last and second to last frequencies (two highest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping values for those frequencies are the same. Define Damping
Input Data
Frequency 1
Value
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Add Row
Clear All
Delete Row
OK
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
3.8
Output Requests
This allows the definition of what data is desired from the analysis code in the form of results. The form consists of two formats: Basic and Advanced. The Basic form retains the simplicity of being able to specify the output requests over the entire model and uses the default settings of MSC.Nastran Case Control commands. There is a special set defined in MSC.Patran called ALL FEM. This set represents all nodes and elements associated with Object defined on the Analysis Form (p. 173). This default set is used for all output requests in the Basic Output Requests (p. 232) form. The Advanced version of this form allows the user to vary these default options. Since output requests have to be appropriate to the type of analysis, the form changes depending on the solution sequence. The Advanced Output Requests (p. 233) also adds the capability of being able to associate a given output request to a subset of the model using MSC.Patran groups. This capability can be used effectively in significantly reducing the results that are created for a model, optimizing the sizes and translation times of output files. The creation of MSC.Patran groups are documented in Group>Create (p. 214) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. The results types that will be brought into MSC.Patran due to any of these requests, are documented in Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities (p. 277). In that chapter, tables are presented that correlate the MSC.Nastran results block, and the MSC.Patran primary and secondary results labels with the various output requests. Note: Many of the output requests that can be defined on the Output Request forms currently apply only to the printed values in the MSC.Nastran output file; these result quantities cannot be imported and postprocessed in MSC.Patran. For guidance on specific quantities, review Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities (p. 277).
Basic Output Requests

This form is used to select output requests with their default options. The set is always All FEM, which means results for all nodes or elements in the model. A default set of output requests is always preselected. Output Requests
SUBCASE NAME: Default SOLUTION SEQUENCE: 101 Form Type: Basic This option menu is used to switch between the advanced and basic versions of this form. The available output requests depend on the active Solution Sequence as indicated by this value.
Select Result Type Displacements Element Stresses Constraint Forces Multi-Point Constraints Forces Element Forces Applied Loads Element Strain Energies Element Strains
This listbox displays the appropriate result types that may be selected for the solution sequence indicated at the top of the form. The output requests are selected one at a time by clicking.
Output Requests DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM;BY=0 STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CORNER)=All FEM SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM ESE=ALL FEM
This listbox displays the selected output requests for the subcase shown at the top of the form.
Delete
The Delete button deletes the output request highlighted in the Output Requests listbox.
OK
Defaults
Cancel
Note: The OK button accepts the output requests and closes the form. The Defaults button deletes all output requests and replaces them with defaults. The Cancel button closes the form without saving the output requests.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Advanced Output Requests

This form provides great flexibility in creating output requests. Output requests may be associated with different groups (SET options in MSC.Nastran) as well as different superelements1. The output requests available depend on the chosen Solution Types (p. 180), Solution Parameters (p. 183), and Translation Parameters (p. 176). The Advanced Output Requests form is sensitive to the Result Type selected. The Form Type, Delete, OK, Defaults, and Cancel buttons operate exactly like on the Basic Output Requests (p. 232) form. A description of the output requests and their associated options are listed in Table 3-2 and Table 3-3.
1At the present time, superelement specifications are allowed only in the structured linear static
solution type (Solution Sequence 101).
Use this listbox to select the result type to be created.
This listbox is used to select the group to which the output requests relate.
Output Request
SUBCASE NAME: Default SOLUTION SEQUENCE: 101 Form Type: Advanced Select Group/SET All FEM default_group
Select Result Type Displacements Element Stresses Constraint Forces Multi-Point Constraints Forces Element Forces Applied Loads Element Strain Energies Element Strains
Options Sorting: By Grid Points Rectangular von Mises Cubic/Corner Strcur Element Stresses
Output Requests DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM;BY=0 STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CORNER)= SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM
Format: Tensor: Element Points: Plate Strain Curv: Composite Plate Opt:
Suppress Print for Result Type Create Delete Adaptive Cycle Output Interval = 0 OK Defaults Cancel
This button creates output requests for highlighted result types. It also modifies highlighted output requests. The button label changes to reflect the operation. Use this list box to select output requests that are to be modified or deleted.
This databox appears for SOL 101 and 103 when the model contains p-elements. Other options will be presented, such as Percent of Step Output and Intermediate Output Options depending on conditions listed in Table 3-3. These are the options that are appropriate to the highlighted result type. They also indicate the options that were selected for a highlighted output request. See Table 3-2.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Table 3-2 Output Request Descriptions Case Control Command or Bulk Data Entry DISPLACEMENT VECTOR STRESS SPCFORCES MPCFORCES
Output Request Displacements Eigenvectors Element Stresses Constraint Forces MultiPoint Constraint Forces Element Forces Applied Loads Nonlinear Applied Loads
Description Requests nodal displacements. Requests nodal eigenvectors. Requests elemental stresses. Requests forces of single- point constraints. Requests forces of multipoint constraints (for versions 68 or higher). Requests elemental forces. Requests equivalent nodal applied loads. Requests equivalent nonlinear applied loads. Sorting and format options are not allowed with this request. Requests elemental strain energies and energy densities. No options are allowed with this output request. Requests elemental strains. Requests stresses at grid points. Requests nodal velocities. Requests nodal accelerations. Requests grid point force balance at nodes. Sorting and format options are not allowed with this request. Requests mesh stress discontinuities based on grid point stresses. Requests mesh stress discontinuities based on element stresses.
FORCE OLOAD NLLOAD
Element Strain Energies
ESE
Element Strains Grid Point Stresses Velocities Accelerations Grid Point Force Balance
STRAIN GPSTRESS VELOCITY ACCELERATION GPFORCE
Grid Point Stress Discontinuities Element Stress Discontinuity
GPSDCON
ELSDCON
Table 3-3 Output Request Form Options Case Control or Bulk Data Options SORT1 Multiple Select Allowed No
Options Sorting
Label By Nodes/Ele ments By Frequency/ Time
Groups Elements
Descriptions Output is presented as tabular listing of nodes/elements for each load, frequency, eigenvalue, or time. Output is presented as tabular listing of frequency/time for each node or element type. Requests real and imaginary format for complex output. Requests magnitude and phase format for complex output. Requests von Mises stresses or strains. Requests Maximum shear or Octahedral stresses or strains. Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains at the corner grid points as well as the center. Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains at the corner grid points as well as the center using the strain gage approach. Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains at the corner grid points as well as the center using bilinear extrapolation. Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains at the center only. Composite element ply stresses and failure indices are suppressed. Element stresses for the equivalent homogeneous element are output. Composite element ply stresses and failure indices are output. Model should contain PCOMP entry defining composites.
SORT2
Elements
No
Format
Rectangular Polar
REAL PHASE VONMISES MAXS CORNER
Elements Elements Elements Elements Elements
No No No No No
Tensor
Von Mises Maximum Shear
Element Points
Corner
Strain Gage
SGAGE
Elements
No
Bilinear
BILIN
Elements
No
Center Composite Element Plate Options Stresses
CENTER NOCOMPS= -1, LSTRN = 0 in Bulk Data
Elements Elements: Surfaces
No No
Ply Stresses
NOCOMPS= 1,LSTRN = 0 in Bulk Data
Elements: Surfaces
No
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Table 3-3 Output Request Form Options (continued) Case Control or Bulk Data Options NOCOMPS= 1,LSTRN = 1 in Bulk Data NOCOMPS= 0,LSTRN=0 in Bulk Data Multiple Select Allowed No
Options
Label
Groups Elements: Surfaces
Descriptions Composite element ply strains and failure indices are output. Model should contain PCOMP card defining composites. Composite element ply stresses and failure indices as well as Element stresses for the equivalent homogeneous element are output. Model should contain PCOMP entry defining composites. Composite element ply strains and failure indices as well as Element stresses for the equivalent homogeneous element are output. Model should contain PCOMP entry defining composites. This option is available for Element Strains output requests only. Strains and curvatures are output at the reference plane for plate elements. This option is available for Element Strains output requests only. Strains at locations Z1 and Z2 (specified under element properties) are output at the reference plane for plate elements. Output is presented as tabular listing of nodes/elements for each load, frequency, eigenvalue, or time. Output is presented as tabular listing of frequency/time for each node or element type.
Composite Ply Strains Plate Options
Element and Ply Stresses
Elements: Surfaces
No
Element and Ply Strains
NOCOMPS= 0,LSTRN=1 in Bulk Data
Elements: Surfaces
No
Plate Strain Options
Plane & Curv.
STRCUR
Elements: Surfaces
No
Fiber
FIBER
Elements: Surfaces
No
Sorting
By Nodes /Elements
SORT1
Nodes
No
By Frequency/ Time
SORT2
Nodes
No
Table 3-3 Output Request Form Options (continued) Case Control or Bulk Data Options REAL PHASE COORD CID Multiple Select Allowed No No Yes
Options Format
Label Rectangular Polar
Groups Nodes Nodes Elements: Surfaces, Volumes Elements: Volumes
Descriptions Requests real and imaginary format for complex output. Requests magnitude and phase format for complex output. Selects the output coordinate frame for grid point stress output. Coord 0 is the basic coordinate frame. Requests direct stress, principal stresses, direction cosines, mean pressure stress and von Mises equivalent stresses to be output. Requests principal stresses, direction cosines, mean pressure stress and von Mises equivalent stresses to be output. Requests direct stress, mean pressure stress and von Mises equivalent stresses to be output. Specifies that grid point stresses will be output at all fibre locations, that is at Z1, Z2 and the reference plane. Z1 and Z2 distances are specified as element properties (default Z1=-thickness/2, Z2= +thickness/2).
Output Coordinate
Coord
Volume Output
Both
Blank
Yes
Principal
PRINCIPAL
Elements: Volumes
Yes
Direct
DIRECT
Elements: Volumes
Yes
Fiber
All
FIBER, ALL
Elements: Surfaces
Yes
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Table 3-3 Output Request Form Options (continued) Case Control or Bulk Data Options FIBER, MID Multiple Select Allowed Yes
Options Fiber
Label Mid
Groups Elements: Surfaces Elements: Surfaces
Descriptions Specifies that grid point stresses will be output at the reference plane. Specifies that grid point stresses will be output at distance Z1 from the reference plane (default Z1=thickness/2). Specifies that grid point stresses will be output at distance Z2 from the reference plane (default Z2=+thickness/2). Specifies the x-axis of the output coordinate frame to be the reference direction for the positive fiber and shear stress output. Specifies the y-axis of the output coordinate frame to be the reference direction for the positive fiber and shear stress output. Specifies the z-axis of the output coordinate frame to be the reference direction for the positive fiber and shear stress output. Specifies the topological method for calculating average grid point stresses. This is the default. Specifies the geometric interpolation method for calculating average grid point stresses. This method should be used when there are large differences in slope between adjacent elements.
Z1
FIBER, Z1
Yes
Z2
FIBER, Z2
Elements: Surfaces
Yes
Normal
X1
NORMAL X1
Elements: Surfaces,
Yes
X2
NORMAL X2
Elements: Surfaces
Yes
X3
NORMAL X3
Elements: Surfaces
Yes
Method
Topological
TOPOLOGICAL
Elements: Surfaces
Yes
Geometric
GEOMETRI C
Elements: Surfaces
Yes
Table 3-3 Output Request Form Options (continued) Case Control or Bulk Data Options AXIS, X1 Multiple Select Allowed Yes
Options X-axis of Basic Coord X1
Label
Groups Elements: Surfaces
Descriptions Specifies that the x-axis of the output coordinate frame should be used as the x-output axis and the local x-axis when geometric interpolation method is used. Specifies that the y-axis of the output coordinate frame should be used as the x-output axis and the local x-axis when geometric interpolation method is used. Specifies that the z-axis of the output coordinate frame should be used as the x-output axis and the local x-axis when geometric interpolation method is used. Treats multiple element intersections as stress discontinuities in the geometric interpolation method. Does not treat multiple element intersections as stress discontinuities in the geometric interpolation method. Defines the tolerance to be used for interelement slope differences. Slopes beyond this tolerance will signify discontinuous stresses. An integer n that specifies the percentage of intermediate outputs to be presented for transient and nonlinear transient analyses.
X-axis of Basic Coord
X2
AXIS, X2
Elements: Surfaces
Yes
X3
AXIS, X3
Elements: Surfaces
Yes
Branch
Break
BREAK
Elements: Surfaces
Yes
No Break
NOBREAK
Elements: Surfaces
Yes
Tolerance
0.0
TOL=0.0
Elements: Surfaces
Yes
Percent of Step Output
100
NOi Field of TSTEP and TSTEPNL entry
All
Once per subcase
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Table 3-3 Output Request Form Options (continued) Case Control or Bulk Data Options BY = n on OUTPUT Bulk Data entry Multiple Select Allowed Once per subcase
Options Adaptive Cycle Output Interval
Label 0
Groups pelements
Descriptions An integer n that requests intermediate outputs for each nth adaptive cycle. For n=0, only the last adaptive cycle results are output. This is available for SOLs 101 and 103 for versions 68 and higher. Intermediate outputs are requested for every computed load increment. Applicable for nonlinear static solution type only. Intermediate outputs are requested for the last load of the subcase. Applicable for nonlinear static solution type only. Intermediate outputs are requested for every computed and user-specified load increment. Applicable for nonlinear static solution type only. Print to the .f06 file is suppressed for the result type when this is selected.
Intermediate Output Options
Yes
INTOUT field of NLPARM Bulk Data entry INTOUT field of NLPARM Bulk Data entry INTOUT field of NLPARM Bulk Data entry Specifies PLOT option instead of PRINT on the Case Control Output request entry.
All
Once per subcase
No
All
Once per subcase
All
All
Once per subcase
Suppress Print for Result Type
N/A
All
Yes
Edit Output Requests Form

Use this form to edit the outputs request associated with selected subcases. To access this form, select the Output Requests button on the Subcases form with the Action set to Global Data.
Edit Output Requests
SOLUTION SEQUENCE: RESULT TYPE: OUTPUT REQUEST: Select Group(s)/SET All FEM default_group
101 Displacements DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM

Options Sorting: Format: Tensor: Element Points: Plate Strain Curv: Composite Plate Opt: By Node/Element Rectangular Von Mises Bilinear Plane & Curv. Element Stresses
The top half of the form changes based on what cell or column of cells are selected.
Suppress Print for Result Type
OK
Default
Displacements Test1 Test2 Test3 DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL> DISPLACEMENT(SORT2,REAL)=ALL> DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL>
Element Stresses STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,B> STRESS(SORT2,PHASE,MAX,BILI> STRESS(SORT1,PHASE,VONMISES,>
Selecting the Default button when a single cell is selected resets the selected output request to its default setting.
Subcase Defaults
Clear Cell(s)
OK
Cancel
Inactive (greyed out) until a subcase label (column 1) is selected. When this button is selected, the top half of the form will become inactive, and the default output request function (named user_change_default_out_req) will be called. This will load user defined defaults or the system defined defaults if user ones do not exist.
Closes the form and saves the selected changes. To apply the new output requests, you must select Apply on the parent Subcases/Global Data form.
The row labels for the spreadsheet are the selected subcases from the parent form. The Output Requests for each subcase are stored in cells of the spreadsheet. Clears the selected cells. You can select individual cells, multiple cells in a column, entire columns, or entire rows.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Notes:
The Edit Output Requests form opens with focus in the first result type of the first
subcase.
The top half of the Edit Output Requests form is similar to the Advanced Output
Request form.
The spreadsheet column labels are the result types for the current solution type. Putting focus in a cell causes the top half of the form to reflect the current setting, just
like the current advanced output request form. This means that the databox RESULT TYPE: gets updated with the result type of the currently selected cell. The OUTPUT REQUESTS: databox is also updated to show the actual content of the cell.
If a cell is initially empty, selecting it will cause the top half of the form to display the
appropriate default setting for the selected result type (i.e., column).
Selecting a column header will allow you to change all subcase output requests of a
particular type. The top half of the Edit Output Requests form will set to the default request of the particular result type.
When you select a set of contiguous column cells, the top half of the form will configure
to the upper most selected cell.
You cannot select multiple columns.
Default Output Request Information

In order to make use of this new feature you will need to create a PCL file that contains the function user_change_default_out_req which will overwrite the existing default file in MSC.Patran. This new PCL file will need to be compiled and then the resulting library (.plb) will need to be loaded into Patran. This can be done using the p3midilog.pcl or the p3epilog.pcl file. The user_change_default_out_req function makes use of the mscn_user_add_out_req and the mscn_user_del_out_req functions to add and delete default Output Request types. These two functions are defined as follows:
mscn_user_add_out_req
(or_num, or_value)
Description: This function adds either a specified version or a default version of an Output Request type to the list of default Output Requests. Input: INTEGER or_num The OR number of the output request type to add (See Table 34). STRING or_value The value of the selected output request type. Blank implies the default value.
mscn_user_del_out_req
(or_num)
Description: This function deletes the specified Output Request type from the list of default Output Requests. Input: INTEGER or_num The OR number of the Output Request type to delete (See Table 3-4). Code Sample
FUNTION user_change_default_out_req(sol_seq) INTEGER sol_seq IF (sol_seq == 101 || sol_seq == 106) THEN /* This will add this version of the Output Request type to the list of default */ /* Output Requests for solution 101 and 106. */ mscn_user_add_out_req (4,MPCFORCES(SORT2,REAL)=ALL FEM) /* This will add the default version of these Output Request types from the list */ /* of default Output Requests for solution 101 and 106. */ mscn_user_add_out_req (10, ) mscn_user_add_out_req (6, ) /* This will delete these Output Request types from the list of default */ /* Output Requests for solution 101 and 106. */ mscn_user_del_out_req (1) mscn_user_del_out_req (2) mscn_user_del_out_req (3) END IF END FUNCTION
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
The following is a table that shows the current predefined default Output Requests (those marked with an X) and the allowed options (those marked with an O) for the various solution sequences. Table 3-4 Result ID Number (Solution Sequence)
101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 115 129 153 159
OR Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
x o x x o x x o x x x o x o o where:
x o o x o o o o o o x o o o o
x x x x x x x x x x x x x
o o o
o o o o
o o
o o o o o
o o o
o o o
o x
o o
x o x
o o o o o o o o
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
o o
o o
o o x
o o
o o o o
o o x o o o o o x x x x o o o o o o o o
1 = Displacement, 2 = stress, 3 = spcforces, 4 = mpcforces, 5 = forces, 6 = oload, 7 = nlload, 8 = ese, 9 = strain, 10 = gpstress, 11 = velocity, 12 = acceleration, 13 = gpforce, 14 = gpsdcon, 15 = elsdcon, 16 = vector, 17 = thermal, 18 = flux, 19 = ht_oload, 20 = ht_spcforces, 21 =enthalpy, 22 = hdot
OR # 1 2 3 4 5
Default Value DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=All FEM;PARAM,NOCOMPS,-1 SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM MPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM FORCE(SORT1,REAL,BILIN)=All FEM
6 7 8 9 10
OLOAD(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM NLLOAD=All FEM ESE=All FEM STRAIN(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,STRCUR,BILIN)=All FEM GPSTRESS=All FEM; VOLUME # SET,PRINCIPAL,SYSTEM Coord 0; SURFACE # SET #,FIBRE ALL,SYSTEM Coord 0, AXIS X1,NORMAL R, TOPOLOGICAL,BRANCH BREAK VELOCITY(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM ACCELERATION(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM GPFORCE=All FEM GPSDCON=All FEM; VOLUME # SET #,PRINCIPAL,SYSTEM Coord 0; SURFACE # SET #,FIBRE ALL,SYSTEM Coord 0, AXIS X1,NORMAL R, TOPOLOGICAL 0.,BRANCH BREAK ELSDCON=All FEM; VOLUME # SET #,PRINCIPAL,SYSTEM Coord 0; SURFACE # SET #,FIBRE ALL,SYSTEM Coord 0, AXIS X1,NORMAL R, TOPOLOGICAL 0.,BRANCH BREAK VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM THERMAL=(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM FLUX(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM OLOAD(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM SPCFORCES(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM ENTHALPY(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM HDOT(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM
11 12 13 14
15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Note:
In SOL 109, 112 & 159 will have SORT2 as the default in some versions of MSC.Patran.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Subcases Direct Text Input

This form is used to directly enter entries into the Case Control section for the defined subcase.
Directly entered entries may potentially conflict with those created by the interface. Writing these entries to the file can be controlled with this toggle.
Direct Text Input

Write To Input Deck
OK
Clear
Reset
Cancel
Saves the current setting and data for the four sections and closes the form.
Clears the current form.
Resets the form back to the data values it had at the last OK.
Resets all four forms back to its previous value and closes the form.
3.9
Select Superelements
The superelements created in the FEM menu are displayed in the form below. The superelements for a subcase are selected by highlighting the name in the listbox. Default button unselects all the superelements. Select Superelements:
Available Superelements superelement 1 superelement 2 superelement 3 superelement 4
OK
Defaults
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
3.10
Select Explicit MPCs...

The Explict MPCs created in the Element menu can be selected for a given subcase. The highlight of selected Explicit MPCs is supportedwhen this form is displayed. The All MPCs toggle indicates that all the Explicit MPCs already created or created later will be used for the subcase being created. The All MPCs toggle should be turned OFF in order to select MPCs. MPXADD SID is the ID used for identifying the selected MPCs for the subcase. Select Explicit MPCs:
All MPCs Available MPCs 1 2 3 4
MPCADD SID = OK Defaults Cancel
3.11
Subcase Select
This form appears when the Subcase Select button is selected on the Analysis form. This form is used to select a sequence of subcases associated with an analysis job. Subcase Select
Subcases For Solution Sequence: Default Second-Load-Case Pressure-Case 3-g-Pullup 101 Displays all the available subcases for the current solution sequence. The current solution sequence is displayed at the top of the form.
x Select All x
Default
x Unselect All x
Subcases Selected:
Displays all subcases that have been associated with the current job name.
OK
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
3.12
Restart Parameters
This format of the Analysis form appears when the Action is set to Analyze and the Object is Restart. Currently, restarts are only supported for the Linear Static (101), Nonlinear Static (106), and Normal Modes (103) Solution Sequences. Linear and Nonlinear Static jobs can be restarted as Linear or Nonlinear Static. Normal Modes jobs can be restarted as Frequency Response, or Transient Response. The DBALL and the MASTER files for the initial job must be present in the current directory when the restart job is submitted.The Restart Parameters button on the main analysis form allows the user to enter information about where to resume the analysis. The MSC.Patran Analysis Manager Users Manual contains more information on how to submit restart jobs with Analysis Manager. Analysis
Action: Object: Analyze Restart Indicates the selected Analysis Code and Analysis Type, as defined in the Preferences>Analysis (p. 321) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Method: Analysis Deck Code: MSC.Nastran Type: Structural
Select an Initial Job List of names for existing analysis jobs. Select the jobname of the analysis to restart from.
Available Restart Jobs List of names for existing restart jobs. Select the name of an existing restart job or enter the name for a new restart job in the databox below.
Restart Job Name Name to use for the restart job. An existing restart job may be modified and/or resubmitted by making a selection from the Available Restart Jobs listbox. Translation Parameters... Solution Type... Direct Text Input... Subcases... Subcase Select... Restart Parameters... Analysis Manager...
Apply
Linear Static/Normal Modes This subordinate form appears when the Restart Parameters button is selected on the Analysis form and the solution type of the initial job is Linear Static or Normal Modes. Set Restart Parameters
Restart Parameters: Start from Version Number = LAST Save Old Restart Data Requests that the restart data for the specified version be saved. This results in a KEEP option on the RESTART File Management statement. Defines the version number from which to restart. This is the VERSION field on the RESTART file management statement.
OK
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Nonlinear Static This subordinate form appears when the Restart Parameters button is selected on the Analysis form and the solution type is Nonlinear Static. Set Restart Parameters
Restart Parameters: Start from Version Number = LAST Start from Increment Number (LOOPID) = 0 Start from Subcase Number (SUBID+1) = 0 Save Old Restart Data Defines the subcase number to start from in the list of subcases for this job. The value entered should be one greater than the SUBID from the initial jobs print file (*.f06). This is the value of the PARAM,SUBID Bulk Data entry. Defines the increment number to start the analysis from. This is the value of the PARAM,LOOPID Bulk Data entry. Defines the version number to restart the analysis from. This is the VERSION field on the RESTART File Management statement.
OK
Cancel
Requests that the restart data for the specified version be saved. This results in a KEEP option on the RESTART File Management statement.
3.13
Optimize
This form appears when the Analysis toggle is chosen on the main menu. When preparing for an analysis run, select Optimize as the Action. Analysis
Action: Optimize Sets up the menu for Optimization Analysis. Object: Entire Model Method: Full Run
Code: MSC.Nastran Type: Structural Study: Available Jobs List of already existing jobs.
Job Name test3 Job Description MSC.Nastran job created on 09-Oct-97
Translation Parameters... Optimization Parameters... Direct Text Input... Subcases... Subcase Select... Analysis Manager... Brings up the Subcase Select Optimize (p. 258)form to select subcases with different solution sequences. Apply Brings up the Subcases (p. 256) form that creates a subcase whose solution type can be changed at the time of subcase creation. Brings up the Optimization Parameters (p. 255)menu for Global and Optimization Analysis Parameters.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Optimization Parameters
This form appears when the Optimization Parameters button is selected on the Analysis/Optimize form. It is used to define optimization parameter for the job. Optimization Parameters
Automatic Constraints. Mass Calculation: Tolerance Angle = Maximum Printed Lines = Wt.-Mass Conversion = Lumped 20. 999999999 1.0 Use Shell Normals. Data Deck Echo: None
Plate Rz Stiffness Factor = 0.0 Maximum Run Time = Node i.d. for Wt. Gener. = 5 Parameter P2 controls what type of design data or optimization results are printed in an f06 file. Toggle selection is accumulative. Parameter P1 controls how often design data are written. Default (P1=0) prints initial results and final results (if an optimization task is performed). 600
Maximum Number of Design cycles (DESMAX) = Design Data to be Printed (P2): Objective and design variables. Constraints.
Pproperties. Responses. 0 0 0.001 1e-20 0.001 0.01 0.2 1.0 0.01 0.05
Print Design Data (P1) every n-th cycle where n = Print Analysis Results (NASPRT) every n-th cycle where n = Relative Objective Convergence (CONV1) = Absolute Objective Convergence (CONV2) = Relative Convergence on Design Variables (CONVDV) = Relative Convergence on Properties (CONVPR) = Fractional Property Change (DELP) = Fractional Design Variable Change (DELX) = Minimum Property Move Limit (DPMIN) = Minimum Design Variable Move Limit (DXMIN) =
Apply
Defaults
Cancel
During any optimiza-tion design cycle, the change in the properties and design variables are limited to maintain a good approximate model. Parameters DELP and DELX are used to specify such a move limit. DPMIN and DXMIN are used to provide a minimum change to avoid numerical difficulties.
These are the criteria for the objective function, design variable, and design properties which an optimizer uses to determine whether the design optimization process converges or not. Relaxing these criteria, in general, may reduce the number of design cycles for an optimization job to terminate.
Subcases
This form appears when the Subcases button is selected on the Analysis/Optimize form. Subcases
Solution Type: 101 LINEAR STATIC Available Subcases Default
Displays all the available subcase based on the solution type selection.
Subcase Name The subcase name that is being created. Subcase Description Subcase description which can be up to 256 characters long. Available Load Cases Default List of available loadcases.
Constraints in Current Subcase List of the associated constraints with the selected subcase.
Subcase Options Subcase Parameters... Output Requests... Direct Text Input... Select Superelements... Apply Delete Cancel Displays the Subcase Parameters form. For more information see Subcase Parameters (p. 257).
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Subcase Parameters
This form appears when the Subcase Parameters button is selected on the Subcases form. Subcase Parameters
Inertia Relief Alternate Reduction
OK
Cancel
Indicates that an alternate method of performing the static condensation is desired. The PARAM, ALTRED,YES command is included if selected and if Database Run is also selected.
Indicates that the inertia relief flags are to be set by including the PARAM, INREL,-1 command. This flag can only be chosen if Database Run is selected and Cyclic Symmetry is disabled. If inertia relief is selected, a node-ID for weight generation must be selected. A PARAM, GRDPNT and a SUPORT command will be written to the input file using the same node-ID selected for weight generation. The SUPORT card will specify all 6 degrees of freedom.
Subcase Select Optimize

This form appears when the Subcase Select button is selected on the Analysis/Optimize form. This form is used to select a sequence of subcases associated with an optimization analysis job. Subcase Select
Current Job: test3 Solution Type: Subcases Available: Default 101 LINEAR STATIC Used to filter the subcases by their solution type
List of subcases based on the solution type setting.
x Select All x
x Unselect All
Subcases Selected: 101 Default 103 Default List of the selected subcases.
OK
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
3.14
Interactive Analysis
The MSC.Patran Preference for MSC.Nastran has a new capability that enables the user to perform visual interactive modal frequency response analysis. The process begins by creating a good modal analysis solution with MSC.Nastran. The interactive modal frequency response solution is then directed from a special set of MSC.Patran menus (wizard). The wizard assists the user in applying the desired loads, specifying damping, selecting result entities, and defining solution criteria for an automated fast restart in Nastran effected from the modal database selected. MSC.Patran running as the client spawns a fast restart job to Nastran functioning as a server. Solution results are automatically returned to the client for visualization. This procedure suggests that there might be several benefits to using this product. The wizard provides a guide for problem definition, minimizing confusion associated with general-purpose menu structures. The fast restart, as the name suggests, is fast, and is executed automatically, as are the clientserver connections and the data transmission. The reduced solution space of the fast restart minimizes the amount of result data that is calculated, stored, transmitted, and displayed. The net result is the ability to quickly apply discrete loads to the structure and immediately visualize the response at select grids or elements of the model. The real time solution paradigm of the interactive scheme does not provide fringe or contour plots of the global structural response. Assumptions. Interactive modal frequency response requires that a normal modes analysis of the structure has been completed using Nastran, and that a .DBALL/MASTER database exists containing the model data and the normal modes solution. Currently, the interactive paradigm presumes the Nastran executable, the modal database, and the MSC.Patran executable are all located in the same directory. To maintain optimal performance, licensing and security should be local also. Given these initial conditions, the following scenarios exist for performing interactive frequency response. Scenario 1. If the initial normal modes analysis was modeled in MSC.Patran, then that MSC.Patran database should be selected under File/Open when starting MSC.Patran. This provides the user with the model from which to exercise the interactive frequency response wizard, provided the correct flag was set to precondition the Nastran normal modes database for this purpose. This is done in MSC.Patran by going to Analysis/Solution Type/Interactive Modal Analysis, and activating the check box. Scenario 2. The normal modes model may have been built and run without using MSC.Patran. If the user intends to use the MSC integrated product to proceed with interactive frequency response, then special care must be taken when preparing the NASTRAN input file for the normal modes analysis. Specifically, the Nastran normal modes input file must contain the following statement just before the CEND delimiter:
include `SSSALTERDIR:run0.V2001`
Note that both ticks are right handed and that SSSALTERDIR must be capitalized. Nastran then creates an environment variable called SSSALTERDIR which points to where the sssalters are located when performing a standard installation. If the user does not have a standard Nastran installation, then he will be required to specify the full directory path. For example, if the file run0.V2001 is located in the directory /scr2/mike/tmp, then he must include the following statement just prior to the CEND delimiter:
include `/scr2/mike/tmp/run0.V2001`
This include statement provides the DMAP alter required to precondition the large modal database. This conditioning enables efficient data manipulation during the interactive frequency response solution phase. Under this scenario, the model data will need to be imported by starting MSC.Patran and requesting Read Input File from the Analysis Menu. This procedure is described in greater detail in Chapter 5 of this users guide, and constitutes reading a NASTRAN Input File for the model data. Once the model data is placed in the MSC.Patran database, interactive frequency response can proceed. The Process. Scenario 1 or 2 above can be followed to provide a MSC.Patran database with a data model suitable for performing interactive frequency response. The Analysis menu shown below controls the interactive analysis process. Submenus for Select NASTRAN .DBALL, Create Loading, Output Requests, Create a Field, and Define Frequencies are discussed. Solution Type--Is currently fixed to Frequency Response (Modal Frequency Response) as the only solution available in interactive analysis format. Subsequent versions of Nastran and MSC.Patran may expand this capability to other solution types. Loading Menu--The loading menu provides a spreadsheet to guide the user through load and boundary condition application. Miscellaneous. The Interactive Modal Frequency response solution process is staged, in the sense that a normal mode solution is performed first to create what we refer to as the large database (so named for obvious reasons), and then a fast restart procedure is used to develop the frequency response. The normal modes solution is where the user specifies any weight to mass conversion quantities (see PARAM, WTMASS) as well as a specification of the mass matrix formulation desired (see PARAM, COUPMASS). The mass units and desired mass matrix formulation then, are automatically accounted for in the subsequent determination of the frequency response quantities calculated.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Analysis Form
Analysis
Action: Object: Method: Analyze Interactive Full Run Every interactive solution will have a user assigned job name associated with it. This provides a record of applied loads, enforced motion boundary conditions, solution frequencies requested, structural damping definition, and output request entities. In a Nastran sense, each job represents a loading condition which reflects application of a number of loads and load types distributed on the structure. Maintaining a record of the interactive run provides a starting point for subsequent analyses whether they are done in the current session, or a subsequent session. Specifically, if a user wanted to change only a frequency dependent load function or damping function, the interactive job storage capacity makes this a simple procedure. Each Interactive Analysis will have its solution specifications stored with a job name (Interactive Name). This allows recovery of all specifications required for performing that particular analysis : loading, damping, solution frequencies, and output entities. If an existing Interactive Job is selected, those input requirements automatically populate the interactive menus. If we want to rerun that analysis, all that is required is to hit APPLY on the Analysis Menu. When the calculations are finished in Nastran, the interactive system automatically positions the user in the Interactive Results section where XY plot requests can be made. Plot requests are not saved in the jobs data.
Code: Type: Study:
MSC.Nastran Structural
Interactive Jobs
Job Name
Select Nastran .DBALL... Create Loading... Output Requests... View Results...
Load types include: Acoustic (Pressure), Force, Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration.
Apply
Select Modal Results .DBALL

The following form appears when you select Select Nastran .DBALL from the Analysis form. This form provides the pointer to the Nastran database which contains the preconditioned normal modes solution. Some additional data is retrieved from this database for use in MSC.Patran. Specifically, the Nastran modal constraint data is provided to MSC.Patran to guarantee that the allowable degrees of freedom available for enforced motion are exposed in the Loading Menu. (Application of enforced motion in modal frequency response requires that the effected degrees of freedom were constrained in the normal modes analysis.) Select Modal Results .DBALL
Job Filter /oakland/users/oivory/hotline/*.DBALL Directory /oivory/hotline/. /oivory/hotline/.. /oivory/hotlin/AA_sessions DBALL Files aaa.DBALL
Selected Results File
OK
Filter
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Loading Form
This form allows you to create loading sets. The following is the default form. Loading Form
Select Damping Field No Damping Create New Field/Table...
Load Type 1 Accelerati>
Load Var.(w)
Amplitude
Load Entities
Direction
Coord Frame
2 3 4 5 6 7
Damping (w): No Damping Add Load
Select Damping Field
Clear All
Delete Load
OK
Defaults
Cancel
Load types include: Acoustic (Pressure), Force, Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration.
The following shows the Loading Form filled out with a few different load conditions. If Load Type = Acoustic, Load Entity can only reference elements and the default direction for the load application is relative to the element normal regardless of the Coord Frame selection. The Basic coordinate system is the default reference (COORD 0), unless, the element was defined in a local coordinate system, in which case that Coord ID will appear in the Coord Frame column. If the user changes the Direction from NORMAL to a specific direction vector, then the applied pressure direction is relative to the Coord Frame referenced. If Load Type = Force, Load Entity can only reference nodes (grid points), and a direction vector is input to define application direction relative to the coordinate frame reference. If no coordinate reference frame is specified, the default becomes the Basic Coordinate system (Coord 0). If Load Type = Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration, Load Entity can only be selected from nodes that will appear in the Load Entities list box. These nodes represent the set of all possible nodes to which enforced motion can be applied, and is limited to nodes that were constrained
during the normal modes analysis. The Basic coordinate system is the default reference (COORD 0), unless, the node was defined in a local coordinate frame, in which case that Coord ID will appear in the Coord Frame column. When Load Type = Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration, and a specific node has been selected in Load Entities, the Direction specification will indicate which directions are available X, Y, and / or Z in the reference coordinate frame. When an enforced motion is defined for a selected degree of freedom, it is eliminated from the available enforced motion set. Only one enforced motion boundary condition per degree of freedom can be applied to a given node. (Enforced motion cannot be applied to rotational degrees of freedom for interactive analysis). Loading Form
Auto Load Selection Element Faces to Load
Load Type 1 Accelerati> Velocity Force Acoustic 3D Displaceme>
Load Var.(w) Linearly_I> Constant_A> Linearly_I> Constant_A> Linearly_I>
Amplitude 4. 1. 6. 1. 10. 1. 1.
Load Entities Node 5, 15 Node 115 Node 15 node 1 6 Element 4 Node 5
Direction Z Z Y <110> Normal Normal X
Coord Frame Coord 0 Coord 1 Coord 0 Coord 0 N/A N/A Coord 0
2 3 4 5 6 7
Displaceme> Owens_Rand> Acoustic 2D Owens_Rand>
Damping (w): Linearly_Increasing Add Load
Select Damping Field
Clear All
Delete Load
OK
Defaults
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Create a Field Form

This form appears when you select the Create New Field/Table... button from the Loading Form. Create A Field
Load Data From Field... Field Name:
Input Data:
Frequency 1
Value
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Add Row
Clear All
Delete Row
Apply
Close
Output Selection Form

This form will allow the user to select nodes and elements for output, and allow him to select the frequencies which interest him in the analysis. The frequency selection form is the same form that is used in standard analysis for sol 111 subcase parameters. Output Selection
Define Frequencies... Grids for Output Define Frequencies prompts a spreadsheet for defining the desired solution frequencies for which output will be available. Output Selection also provides for selecting Nodes / Grids and Elements for which output response is desired. Selection can be made to create output response for complex quantities in either Real / Imaginary or Magnitude / Phase formats. For Interactive Analysis, the output quantities are preset. Close the Output Selection menu. Cancel
Elements for Output
x Real/Imag x Mag/Phase x
OK
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Define Frequencies Form

This form allows the user to define the frequencies of interest in the most complete way. This form allows the users access to FREQ, FREQ1, FREQ2, FREQ3, FREQ4, FREQ5. Define Frequencies
Type: Linear Input Data 0.
Incr. Type 1 Linear
Start Freq.
End Freq.
No Incr.
Cluster/Spread
2 3 4 5 6 7
Add Row
Clear All
Delete Row
OK
Defaults
Cancel
CHAPTER
Read Results
s Overview of Reading Results s Read Output2 s Attach XDB s Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities s Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities
4.1
Overview of Reading Results

The Analysis form will appear when the Analysis toggle, located on the MSC.Patran main form, is chosen.
MSC.Patran
There are currently two actions that allow for importation of results. Read Output2 as the Action on the Analysis form allows the model andor results data to be read into the MSC.Patran database from an MSC. Nastran OUTPUT2 file. Subordinate forms of the Analysis form will define translation parameters, which control the data to be translated, and the OUTPUT2 file from which to translate. These forms are described on the following pages. OUTPUT2 files are created by placing a PARAM,POST,-1 card in the MSC .Nastran bulk data. Attach XDB as the Action on the Analysis form allows the results data from a MSC.Access database (an .xdb file) to be accessed. In this case the results are not read directly into the MSC.Patran database but instead remain in the MSC.Access database. Only what is termed as meta data is read into the MSC.Patran database. Meta data consists of only the Result Case names, their associated subcases, primary and secondary result types, global variables and the file location of the MSC.Access database or .xdb file. The Meta data is used to translate results on the fly when the user attempts to postprocess the model. Subordinate forms of the Analysis form will define translation parameters which control the data to be accessed on attachment. These forms are also described on the following pages. MSC.Access databases are created by placing a PARAM,POST,0 card in the MSC . Nastran bulk data.
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
4.2
Read Output2
This form appears when the Analysis toggle is selected on the main menu. Read Output2, as the selected Action, defines the type of data to be read from the analysis code results file into MSC.Patran. The Object choices are: Result Entities, Model Data, or Both.
When the Object selected is Result Entities, the model data must already exist in the database. No results can be read into MSC.Patran if the associated node or element does not already exist. Model Data only reads the model data that exists in the results file. Both will first read the model data, then the result entities. If Model Data or Both are selected, it is up to the user to ensure that there will not be any ID conflicts with existing model entities.
Defines how far the results translation will proceed. If Translate is selected, a job file containing information for the results translation control is created, and then submitted for translation. If Control File is selected, the procedure will stop as soon as the control file is generated.
Defines the job name to be used for this job. The same job name used for the Analysis menu should be used for the Read Results menu. This will allow MSC.Patran to load the results directly into the load cases that were used for the analysis.
Defines the results file to be read. The form that is called up lists all files recognized as being analysis code results files. By default this is all files with an op2 extension on them. This can be changed with the filter.
Defines any parameters used to control the results or model translation from the analysis code results file.
Results File Formats. The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface supports several different OUTPUT2 file formats. The interface, running on any platform can read a binary format OUTPUT2 file produced by MSC Nastran running on any of these same platforms. For example, a binary OUTPUT2 file produced by MSC .Nastran running on an IBM RS/6000 can be read by MSC.Patran running on DEC Alpha. MSC.Patran may be able to read binary format OUTPUT2 files from other platforms if they contain 32 bit, IEEE format entities (either Big or Little Indian). For platforms that do not produce OUTPUT2 files in these formats, MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran can read OUTPUT2 files created with the FORM=FORMATTED option in MSC .Nastran. This option can be selected from the Analysis/Translation Parameters form in MSC.Patran and directs MSC . Nastran to produce an ASCII format OUTPUT2 file that can be moved between any platforms. The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface detects this format when the OUTPUT2 file is opened, automatically converts it to the binary format, and then reads the model and/or results into the MSC.Patran database. An OUTPUT2 file is created by MSC .Nastran by placing a PARAM,POST,-1 in the bulk data portion of the input deck. The formatted or unformatted OUTPUT2 file is specified in the FMS section using an ASSIGN OUTPUT2 = filename, UNIT=#, FORM=FORMATTED (or UNFORMATTED). See Translation Parameters (p. 176).
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Translation Parameters (OUTPUT2). This subordinate form appears when the Translation Parameters button is selected and Result Entities is the selected Object. When reading results there are three Object options that may be selected: Result Entities, Model Data or Both. This form affects import of all these objects as noted below. Translation Parameters
MSC.Nastran Result Entities Translation Parameters Tolerances Division: Numerical: MSC.Nastran Version: 1.0E-8 1.0E-4 Specification of which version of MSC.Nastran created the OUTPUT2 file to be read. Solid Element orientation differs between versions less than 67 and version 67 and above. Elementally oriented Solid element results may be translated incorrectly if the wrong version is specified. Defines the tolerances used during translation. The division tolerance is used to prevent division by zero errors. The numerical tolerance is used when comparing real values for equality. When the Object is set to Model Data, only these tolerances are available.
68
Additional Results to be Imported Rotational Nodal Results StressStrain Invariants Principal Directions P-element P-order Field Element Results Positions: Nodal
OK
Defaults
Cancel
If an element has results at both the centroid and at the nodes, this filter will indicate which results are to be included in the translation.
Indicates which results categories are to be filtered out during translation. Rotational Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain Principal Direction Results can be skipped during translation. Items selected will be translated. Items not selected will be skipped. By default, Rotational Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain Tensor Principal Directions are ignored during translation.
Create a field that describes the polynomial orders in all p-elements in the model at the end of an adaptive cycle.
4.3
Attach XDB
This form appears when the Analysis toggle is selected on the main menu and Attach XDB is the selected Action, which defines the type of data to be read from the analysis code results file into MSC.Patran.
Three selections under Object are possible: Results Entities, Model Data and Both. When Results Entities is selected, it is assumed that the model data already exists in the MSC.Patran database. Only metadata or catalog information such as Result Cases/Types, Global Variables, and file connection is read into the MSC.Patran database. The results data remains in the XDB file. The Model Data selection only imports Nodes, Elements, and Coordinate Systems. In addition, if the model has Superelements, separate groups are created for each Superelement. The Both selection, imports the Model Data and then attaches the Results Entities.
The Method can currently only be set to Local. This means that the MSC.Access database exists locally, or via NFS, somewhere on the machine that MSC.Patran is running on.
Defines the job name to be used for this job. The same job name used for the Analysis menu should be used for the Read Results menu. This will allow MSC.Patran to load the results directly into the load cases that were used for the analysis.
Defines the results file to be read. This is the MSC.Access database (or .xdb file). The form that is called up lists all files recognized as being analysis code results files. By default, all files with an xdb extension are listed on them. This can be changed with the filter. One may attach up to 20 .xdb files simultaneously.
Defines the parameters used to control Model and Results Translation. This form enables you to select which Superelements are to be imported into MSC.Patran. You can also select a Model Design Cycle cycle/iteration when importing an XDB file with Shape optimization results.
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Results File Formats. The same basic issues exist for MSC.Access databases as for OUTPUT2 files. For example, the MSC.Access database (xdb file) may be exchanged between computer Systems that have binary compatibility. That is, an XDB file generated on a SUN Machine may be used on an IBM/AIX, HPUX or SGI computers. However, in order to exchange the XDB file on binary incompatible machines, one needs to use the TRANS and RECEIVE utilities delivered with every installation of MSC. Nastran. TRANS converts an XDB file generated by MSC.Nastran to an equivalent character, i.e. ASCII, file which can be transported to another computer across the network via ftp or rcp. RECEIVE converts the character file back into the XDB format for postprocessing. For more information on TRANS and RECEIVE utilities, please consult the Configuration and Operations Guide for V70 of MSC.Nastran. A MSC.Access XDB database is created by MSC .Nastran by placing a PARAM,POST,0 in the bulk data portion of the input deck. See Translation Parameters (p. 176). In this release of the product, it is assumed that the Geometry, loads and results ouput all reside in the same physical XDB file. That is, "split" XDB databases are not supported.
Translation Parameters (XDB). This subordinate form appears when the Translation Parameters button is selected and Result Entities is the selected Object.
MSC.Nastran Both Translation Parameters Tolerances Division: Numerical: Model Import Options Create Groups By PIDs Additional Results to be Accessed Rotational Nodal Results Stress/Strain Invariants Principal Directions Element Results Positions: Model Design Cycle Design Iteration 0 1 2 Select which Model Design Cycle to use for the optimized shape you are importing. The default is to import the model based on the last design iteration. This form will only appear if the XDB file contains results of an Optimization run i.e., SOL200. With the Superelement filter you can select any given Superelement to be imported into the MSC.Patran database. The default is to import All Superelements. This form will only appear if the specified XDB file contains Superelements. Nodal 1.0E-8 1.0E-4 This option creates Groups based on Element Properties found in the XDB. For example, if XDB contains CQUAD4 elements with the PSHELL ID of 4536 then MSC.Patran will create a group named PSHELL 4536 containing the CQUAD4 elements and the nodes connecting the elements. Indicates which results categories are to be filtered out during translation. Rotational Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain Principal Direction Results can be skipped during translation. Items selected will be translated. Items not selected will be skipped. By default, Rotational Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain Tensor Principal Directions are ignored during translation.
Defines the tolerances used during translation. The division tolerance is used to prevent division by zero errors. The numerical tolerance is used when comparing real values for equality.
Superelement Filter Superelement ID(s) 0 10 20
Superelement Prefix:
Superelement
Superelement Prefix controls the group names created for each Superelement. For example if you specify "SE" as a prefix, the group name created in MSC.Patran for Superelement 10 will be "SE 10".
OK
Defaults
Cancel
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
4.4
Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities

The following table indicates all the possible results quantities that can be loaded into the MSC.Patran database during results translation from MSC .Nastran. The Primary and Secondary Labels are items selected from the postprocessing menus. The Type indicates whether the results are Scalar, Vector, or Tensor, and determines which postprocessing techniques are available to view the results quantity. Data Block indicates which MSC .Nastran OUTPUT2 data block the data comes from. The Description gives a brief discussion about the results quantity, such as if it is only for certain element types, and what Output Request selection will generate this data block. For design optimization, all of the listed results can be loaded as a function of design cycle. Results.
Primary Label Bar Forces
Secondary Label Rotational Translational Warping Torque
Type Vector Vector Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Tensor Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar
DataBlocks OEF1 OEF1 OEF1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OGS1 OGS1 OGS1 OGS1 OGS1 OGS1
Description Bar moments Bar forces Warping torque Axial safety margin Safety margin in compression Maximum axial strain Minimum axial strain Safety margin in tension Safety margin in torsion Axial safety margin Safety margin in compression Maximum axial stress Minimum axial stress Safety margin in tension Safety margin in torsion Stress tensor Zero shear angle Major principal Minor principal Maximum shear von mises
Bar Strains
Axial Safety Margin Compression Safety Margin Maximum Axial Minimum Axial Tension Safety Margin Torsional Safety Margin
Bar Stresses
Axial Safety Margin Compression Safety Margin Maximum Axial Minimum Axial Tension Safety Margin Torsional Safety Margin
Grid Point Stresses
Stress Tensor Zero Shear Angle Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear von Mises
Primary Label Gap Results
Secondary Label Displacement Force Slip
Type Vector Vector Vector Scalar Scalar Tensor Scalar Tensor Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar
DataBlocks OEF1 or OES1 OEF1 or OES1 OEF1 or OES1 OESNL1 OESNL1 OESNL1 OESNL1 OESNL1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OES1
Description Gap element displacement Gap element force Gap element slip Creep strain Plastic strain Strain tensor Equivalent stress Stress tensor 1st Principal x cosine 1st Principal y cosine 1st Principal z cosine 2nd Principal x cosine 2nd Principal y cosine 2nd Principal z cosine 3rd Principal x cosine 3rd Principal y cosine 3rd Principal z cosine Zero shear angle 1st Principal x cosine 1st Principal y cosine 1st Principal z cosine 2nd Principal x cosine 2nd Principal y cosine 2nd Principal z cosine 3rd Principal x cosine 3rd Principal y cosine 3rd Principal z cosine Zero shear angle
Nonlinear Strains
Creep Strain Plastic Strain Strain Tensor
Nonlinear Stresses Principal Strain Direction
Equivalent Stress Stress Tensor 1st Principal x cosine 1st Principal y cosine 1st Principal z cosine 2nd Principal x cosine 2nd Principal y cosine 2nd Principal z cosine 3rd Principal x cosine 3rd Principal y cosine 3rd Principal z cosine Zero Shear Angle
Principal Stress Direction
1st Principal x cosine 1st Principal y cosine 1st Principal z cosine 2nd Principal x cosine 2nd Principal y cosine 2nd Principal z cosine 3rd Principal x cosine 3rd Principal y cosine 3rd Principal z cosine Zero Shear Angle
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label Shear Panel Forces
Secondary Label Force12 Force14 Force21 Force23 Force32 Force34 Force41 Force43 Kick Rotational Shear Translational
Type Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Vector Scalar Vector Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Tensor Tensor Tensor Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar
DataBlocks OEF1 OEF1 OEF1 OEF1 OEF1 OEF1 OEF1 OEF1 OEF1 OEF1 OEF1 OEF1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OEF1 OEF1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 ONRGY1 ONRGY1 ONRGY1
Description Shear force from nodes 1 to 2 Shear force from nodes 1 to 4 Shear force from nodes 2 to 1 Shear force from nodes 2 to 3 Shear force from nodes 3 to 2 Shear force from nodes 3 to 4 Shear force from nodes 4 to 1 Shear force from nodes 4 to 3 Kick forces Moments at nodes Shear force in panel Forces at nodes Average shear strain in panel Maximum shear strain in panel Shear safety margin of panel Average shear stress in panel Maximum shear stress in panel Shear safety margin of panel Force resultants and moment resultants Moment stress resultants Strain curvatures of a plate Curvature of strain 1st principal Curvature of strain 2nd principal Curvature of maximum shear strain Curvature of von Mises strain Curvature of zero shear angle Elements total strain energy Elements strain energy density Elements percentage of total strain density
Shear Panel Strains
Average Shear Maximum Shear Safety Margin
Shear Panel Stresses
Average Shear Maximum Shear Safety Margin
Shell Forces
Force Resultant Moment Resultant
Strain Curvatures
Strain Tensor 1st Principal 2nd Principal Maximum Shear von Mises Zero Shear Angle
Strain Energy
Energy Energy Density Percent of Total
Primary Label Strain Invariants
Secondary Label 1st Principal 2nd Principal 3rd Principal Maximum Shear Mean Pressure Octahedral Shear von Mises
Type Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Tensor Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Tensor Vector Vector Vector Vector Vector Vector Vector Vector Vector Vector Vector
DataBlocks OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OSTR1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OES1 OUGV1 OUGV1 OPG1 OPG1 OQG1 OQG1 OUGV1 OUGV1 OPHIG OPHIG OPNL1
Description Strain 1st principal Strain 2nd principal Strain 3rd principal Maximum shear strain Mean strain pressure Octahedral shear strain von Mises equivalent strain Strain tensor Stress 1st Principal Stress 2nd Principal Strain 3rd Principal Maximum shear stress Mean stress principal Octahedral shear stress von Mises equivalent stress Stress tensor Nodal angular accelerations Nodal translational accelerations Nodal equivalent applied moments Nodal equivalent applied forces Nodal moments of single-point constraints Nodal forces of single-point constraint Nodal rotational displacements Nodal translational displacements Nodal rotational eigenvectors Nodal translational eigenvectors Nodal nonlinear applied moments
Strain Tensor Stress Invariants
NONE 1st Principal 2nd Principal 3rd Principal Maximum Shear Mean Pressure Octahedral Shear von Mises
Stress Tensor Accelerations
NONE Rotational Translational
Applied Loads
Rotational Translational
Constraint Forces
Displacements
Eigenvectors
Nonlinear Applied Loads
Rotational
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label
Secondary Label Translational
Type Vector Vector Vector Scalar Vector Vector Vector Vector
DataBlocks OPNL1 OUGV1 OUGV1 ERROR OGPFB1* OGPFB1* OGPFB1* OGPFB1*
Description Nodal nonlinear applied forces Nodal angular velocity Nodal translational velocity Elemental error in adaptive analysis Internal nodal force contribution by element Nodal equivalent applied forces Nodal equivalent constraint forces Total nodal equivalent forces due to internal loads, applied loads and constraint forces. Internal nodal moment contribution by element Nodal equivalent applied moments Nodal equivalent constraint moments Total nodal equivalent moments due to internal loads, applied loads and constraint forces. In a shape optimization run, this is the new shape displayed as a deformation of the original shape.
Velocities
Error Grid Point Forces
Estimate Elements Applied Loads Constraint Forces Total
Grid Point Moments
Elements Applied Loads Constraint Forces Total
Vector Vector Vector Vector
OGPFB1* OGPFB1* OGPFB1* OGPFB1*
Shape Change
None
Vector
GEOMIN
Primary Label Active Constraints
Secondary Label Element Stress Element Strain Element Force Element Ply Failure Translational Displacement Rotational Displacement Translational Velocity Rotational Velocity Translational Acceleration Rotational Acceleration Translational SPC Rotational SPC
Type Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Vector Vector Vector Vector Vector Vector Vector Vector
DataBlocks R1TABRG R1TABRG R1TABRG R1TABRG R1TABRG R1TABRG R1TABRG R1TABRG R1TABRG R1TABRG R1TABRG R1TABRG
Description Element stress Element strain Element force Element ply failure Nodal translational displacement Nodal rotational displacement Nodal translational velocity Nodal rotational velocity Nodal translational acceleration Nodal rotational acceleration Nodal translational SPC force Nodal rotational SPC force
Global Variables. In addition to standard results quantities, a number of Global Variables can be created. This table outlines Global Variables that may be created. Global Variables are results quantities where one value is representative of the entire model. Labels Critical Load Factor Time Frequency Damping Ratio Eigenvalue Percent of Load Adaptive Cycle Design Cycle Design Variable Maximum Constraint Value Objective Function S S S S S S S S S S S Type DataBlocks Oxxx Oxxx Oxxx Oxxx Oxxx Oxxx Oxxx Oxxx DESTAB HISADD HISADD HISADD Description Value of buckling load for the given buckling mode. Time value of the time step. Frequency value of the frequency step or for the normal mode. Damping ratio value of a complex eigenvalue analysis. Eigenvalue for normal modes or complex eigenvalue analysis. Percent of load value for a nonlinear static analysis. Cycle number in p-adaptive analysis. Cycle number in an optimization run (SOL 200). Design Variable for optimization (Label from DESTAB, value from HISADD). Maximum constraint value for optimization. Objective function for optimization.
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Coordinate Systems. In some cases, the elemental stresses and strains are transformed from one coordinate frame to another when imported into the MSC.Patran database. The following describes the coordinate systems for these element results after they are imported into the MSC.Patran database. The coordinate system names referred to are described in the MSC.Patran or the MSC .Nastran documentation. CTRIA3 Results are in the MSC .Nastran system which coincides with the MSC.Patran IJK system. At the users request during postprocessing, these results can be transformed by MSC.Patran to alternate coordinate systems. If the user selects a component of a stress or strain tensor to be displayed, by default, the Results application transforms the tensor to a projected global system (Projected Global System). Results are in the MSC .Nastran bisector coordinate system but may be transformed by MSC.Patran to alternate coordinate systems (e.g., global) during postprocessing. If the user selects a component of a stress or strain tensor to be displayed, by default, the Results application transforms the tensor to a projected global system (Projected Global System). Import of results when this element is used in a hyperelastic analysis is not currently supported. The user can request that MSC .Nastran compute element results in either a local element or alternate coordinate system via the PSOLID entry. If the element results are in the local element system, these are converted to the MSC.Patran IJK system on import. If the results are in a system other than local element, they are imported in this system. These results may be transformed to alternate systems during postprocessing. The elemental coordinate system, used by MSC . Nastran for results, is described in the MSC . Nastran documentation. These results are imported into the MSC.Patran database as-is. These results can be postprocessed in MSC.Patran using the As Is options, but they cannot be transformed to alternate coordinate systems.
CQUAD4
CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA
CQUAD8, CTRI6
Projected Global System. The projected system is defined as follows. First, the normal to the shell surface is calculated. This varies for curved elements and is constant for flat elements. If the angle between the normal and the global x-axis is greater than .01 radians, the global x-axis is projected onto the shell surface as the local x-axis. If the angle is less than .01 radians, either the global y-axis or the z-axis (whichever makes the largest angle with the normal) is defined to be the local x-axis. The local y-axis is perpendicular to the plane defined by the normal and the local x-axis. XY Plots. For results from MSC . Nastran design optimization solution 200 runs, three XY Plots are generated, but not posted, when the Read OUTPUT2 option is selected: 1. Objective Function vs. Design Cycle. 2. Maximum Constraint Value vs. Design Cycle. 3. Design Variable vs. Design Cycle. These plots can be viewed under the XY Plot option in MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 7: XY Plotting. When they are initially posted, you will have to expand their windows to view them properly.
Model Data. The following table outlines all the data that will be created in the MSC.Patran database when reading model data from an MSC .Nastran OUTPUT2 file and the location in the OUTPUT2 file from where it is derived. This is the only data extracted from the OUTPUT2 file. This data should be sufficient for evaluating results values. Item Nodes Block GEOM1 Description Node ID Nodal Coordinates Reference Coordinate Frame Analysis Coordinate Frame Coordinate Frame ID Transformation Matrix Origin Can be Rectangular, Cylindrical, or Spherical Element ID Topology (e.g., Quad/4 or Hex20) Nodal Connectivity
Coordinate Frames
GEOM1
Elements
GEOM2
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
4.5
Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities

The following tables list the currently supported quantities from the MSC.Access database (xdb file).To get further information on the MSC.Access, i.e. XDB, objects supported in MSC.Patran, please use the ddlprt and ddlqry utilities delivered with every installation of MSC . Nastran. ddlprt is MSC.Access' on-line documentation. ddlqry is MSC.Access Data Definition Language (DDL) browser. See Configuration and Operations Guide for MSC.Nastran V70. Nodal Results. Primary Label Displacements Secondary Label Translational Rotational Translational Rotational Translational Rotational Eigenvectors Translational Rotational Translational Rotational Translational Rotational Velocities Translational Rotational Translational Rotational Translational Rotational Accelerations Translational Rotational Translational Rotational Translational Rotational Type VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR Objects DISPR DISPR DISPRI DISPRI DISPMP DISPMP DISPR DISPR DISPRI DISPRI DISPMP DISPMP VELOR VELOR VELORI VELORI VELOMP VELOMP ACCER ACCER ACCERI ACCERI ACCEMP ACCEMP
Primary Label Constraint Forces
Secondary Label Translational Rotational Translational Rotational Translational Rotational
Type VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR
Objects SPCFR SPCFR SPCFRI SPCFRI SPCFMP SPCFMP LOADR LOADR LOADRI LOADRI LOADMP LOADMP SGSVR SGSVR SGSVR SGSVR SGSVR SGSVR
Applied Loads
Translational Rotational Translational Rotational Translational Rotational
Grid Point Stresses
Stress Tensor Zero Shear Angle Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Von Mises
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label Grid Point Stresses
Secondary Label Stress Tensor Mean Pressure Octahedral Shear Major Principal Intermediate Principal Minor Principal Major Prin x cosine Intermed Prin x cosine Minor Prin x cosine Major Prin y cosine Intermed Prin y cosine Minor Prin y cosine Major Prin z cosine Intermed Prin z cosine Minor Prin z cosine
Type TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR
Objects SGVVR SGVVR SGVVR SGVVR SGVVR SGSVR SGSVR SGSVR SGSVR SGSVR SGSVR SGSVR SGSVR SGSVR SGSVR EGSVR EGSVR EGSVR EGSVR EGSVR EGSVR
Grid Point Strains
Strain Tensor Zero Shear Angle Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Von Mises
Primary Label Grid Point Strains
Secondary Label Strain Tensor Mean Pressure Octahedral Shear Major Principal Intermediate Principal Minor Principal Major Prin x cosine Intermed Prin x cosine Minor Prin x cosine Major Prin y cosine Intermed Prin y cosine Minor Prin y cosine Major Prin z cosine Intermed Prin z cosine Minor Prin z cosine
Type TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR
Objects EGVVR EGVVR EGVVR EGVVR EGVVR EGSVR EGSVR EGSVR EGSVR EGSVR EGSVR EGSVR EGSVR EGSVR EGSVR SGSDTR SGSDTR SGSDTR SGSDTR SGSDTR SGSDTR SGVDTR SGVDTR SGVDTR SGVDTR SGVDTR SGVDTR SGVDTR SGVDTR
GPS discontinunities
Stress Tensor Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Von Mises Error Estimate Stresss Tensor Mean Pressure Octahedral Shear Major Principal Intermediate Principal Minor Principal Error Estimate Direct Error Estimate Principal
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label Elem Stress discontinunities
Secondary Label Stress Tensor
Type TENSOR
Objects DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR
Major Principal
SCALAR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
Von Mises
SCALAR
Error Estimate
SCALAR
Stresss Tensor Mean Pressure Octahedral Shear Major Principal Intermediate Principal Minor Principal Error Estimate Direct Error Estimate Principal
TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR
Primary Label MPC Constraint Forces
Secondary Label Translational Rotational
Type VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR SCALAR
Objects MPCFR, MPCFRI, MPCFMP MPCFR, MPCFRI, MPCFMP GPFV GPFV GPFV GPFV GPFV GPFV GPFV GPFV GPFV GPFV FBSHR, FBSHRI, FBSHMP SBSHR, SBSHRI, SBSHMP EBSHR, EBSHRI, EBSHMP SBS1R, SBS1RI, SBS1MP
Grid Point Forces
Applied Loads Constraint Forces MPC Forces Elements Total
Grid Point Moments
Applied Loads Constraint Forces MPC Forces Elements Total
Bushing Forces Bushing Stresses Bushing Strains Bushing 1-D Results
Translational, Rotational Translational, Rotational Translational, Rotational Axial Stress, Axial Strain, Axial Force, Axial Displacement Axial Stress, Axial Strain, Axial Force, Axial Displacement SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR
Nonlinear Bushing Force
SCALAR
NBS1R, NBS1RI, NBS1MP
Temperature Enthalpies Rates of Enthalpy Change Constraint Heats Applied Loads
THERR ENTHR ENRCR HTFFR HTFLR
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label Boundary Heat Flux
Secondary Label Applied Loads Free Convection Forced Convection Radiation Total
Type SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR VECTOR
Objects QHBDY QHBDY QHBDY QHBDY QHBDY QBARR, QBEMR,QCONR, QHEXR,QPENR, QQD4R, QQD8R, QRODR, QTETR, QTUBR, QTX6R QBARR, QBEMR, QCONR, QHEXR,QPENR, QQD4R, QQD8R, QRODR, QTETR, QTUBR, QTX6R
Heat Fluxes
Temperature Gradients
VECTOR
Elemental Results. Primary Label Bar Forces Secondary Label Translational Rotational Warping Torque Translational Rotational Warping Torque Translational Rotational Warping Torque Translational Rotational Translational Rotational Translational Rotational Translational Rotational Translational Rotational Translational Rotational Translational Type VECTOR VECTOR SCALAR VECTOR VECTOR SCALAR VECTOR VECTOR SCALAR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTORs Objects FBEMR FBEMR FBEMR FBEMRI FBEMRI FBEMRI FBEMMP FBEMMP FBEMMP FTUBR FTUBR FTUBRI FTUBRI FTUBMP FTUBMP FCONR FCONR FCONRI FCONRI FCONMP FCONMP FELSR FELSRI FELSMP FDMPR FDMPRI FDMPMP Rotational Translational Rotational Translational VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR FBARR FBARR FBARRI FBARRI
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label Bar Forces (continued
Secondary Label Rotational Translational Translational Rotational
Type VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR
Objects FBARMP FBARMP FBRXR FBRXR FSHRR FSHRR FSHRR FSHRR FSHRR FSHRR FSHRR FSHRR FSHRR FSHRR FSHRRI FSHRRI FSHRRI FSHRRI FSHRRI FSHRRI FSHRRI FSHRRI FSHRRI FSHRRI FSHRMP FSHRMP FSHRMP FSHRMP FSHRMP FSHRMP FSHRMP FSHRMP
Shear Panel Forces
Force41 Force21 Force12 Force32 Force23 Force43 Force34 Force14 Kick Shear Force41 Force21 Force12 Force32 Force23 Force43 Force34 Force14 Kick Shear Force41 Force21 Force12 Force32 Force23 Force43 Force34 Force14
Primary Label Shear Panel Forces (continued) Shell Forces
Secondary Label Kick Shear Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant
Type SCALAR SCALAR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR
Objects FSHRMP FSHRMP FQD4R FQD4R FQD4RI FQD4RI FQD4MP FQD4MP FQD8R FQD8R FQD8RI FQD8RI FQD8MP FQD8MP FTRRR FTRRR FTRRRI FTRRRI FTRRMP FTRRMP FTR3R FTR3R FTR3RI FTR3RI FTR3MP FTR3MP FTR6R FTR6R FTR6RI FTR6RI FTR6MP FTR6MP
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label Shell Forces (continued)
Secondary Label Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant Force Resultant Moment Resultant
Type TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR
Objects FQDRR FQDRR FQDRRI FQDRRI FQDRMP FQDRMP FQD4XR FQD4XR FQD4XRI FQD4XRI FQD4XMP FQD4XMP FGAPR FGAPR FGAPR NGAPR NGAPR NGAPR SRODR SRODRI SRODMP SBEMR SBEMRI SBEMMP STUBR STUBRI STUBMP SCONR SCONRI SCONMP
Gap Results
Force Displacement Slip Force Displacement Slip
Stress Tensor
NONE
NONE
TENSOR TENSOR
NONE
TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR
NONE
Primary Label Stress Tensor (continued)
Secondary Label NONE
Type TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR
Objects SELSR SELSRI SELSMP SQD4R SQD4RI SQD4MP SBARR SBARRI SBARMP STETR STETRI STETMP STX6R SQD8R SQD8RI SQD8MP SHEXR SHEXRI SHEXMP SPENR SPENRI SPENMP STRRR STRRRI STRRMP STR6R STR6RI STR6MP STR3R STR3RI STR3MP
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE NONE
TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label Stress Tensor (continued)
Type TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR
Objects SQDRR SQDRRI SQDRMP TQD4R TQD8R TTR3R TTR6R SBRXR SQD4XR SQD4XRI SQD4XMP SBRXR SBEMR SBEMR SBARR SBARR SBARR SBRXR SBRXR SBRXR SBRXR EBEMR EBEMR EBARR EBARR EBARR EBARR EBRXR EBRXR EBRXR EBRXR
NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE
TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR TENSOR
NONE Bar Stresses Maximum Axial Minimum Axial Maximum Axial Minimum Axial Tension Safety Margin Maximum Axial Minimum Axial Maximum Axial Minimum Axial Bar Strains Maximum Axial Minimum Axial Maximum Axial Minimum Axial Tension Safety Margin Compressive Safety Margin Maximum Axial Minimum Axial Maximum Axial Minimum Axial
TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR
Primary Label Strain Tensor
Type ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR
Objects ERODR ERODRI ERODMP EBEMR EBEMRI EBEMMP ETUBR ETUBRI ETUBMP ECONR ECONRI ECONMP EELSR EELSRI EELSMP EQD4R EQD4RI EQD4MP EBARRI EBARR EBARMP ETETR ETETRI ETETMP EQD8R EQD8RI EQD8MP EHEXR EHEXRI EHEXMP EPENR EPENRI EPENMP ETRRR ETRRRI ETRRMP ETR6R ETR6RI ETR6MP ETR3R ETR3RI ETR3MP
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label Strain Tensor (continued)
Type ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR
Objects EQDRR EQDRRI EQDRMP GQD4R GQD8R GTR3R GTR6R EBRXR EQD4XR EQD4XRI EQD4XMP EBRXR SSHRR SSHRR SSHRRI SSHRRI SSHRMP SSHRMP SSHRR SSHRR SSHRRI SSHRRI SSHRMP SSHRMP ESHRR ESHRR ESHRRI ESHRRI ESHRMP ESHRMP
NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE
NONE Shear Panel Stresses Maximum Shear Average Shear Maximum Shear Average Shear Maximum Shear Average Shear Maximum Shear Average Shear Maximum Shear Average Shear Maximum Shear Average Shear Shear Panel Strains Maximum Shear Average Shear Maximum Shear Average Shear Maximum Shear Average Shear
Primary Label Principal Stress Direction
Secondary Label Zero Shear Angle Major Prin x cosine Minor Prin x cosine Intermed Prin x cosine Major Prin y cosine Minor Prin y cosine
Type SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR
Objects SQD4R STETR STETR STETR STETR STETR STETR STETR STETR STETR SQD8R SHEXR SHEXR SHEXR SHEXR SHEXR SHEXR SHEXR SHEXR SHEXR SPENR SPENR SPENR SPENR SPENR SPENR SPENR SPENR SPENR STRRR STR6R STR3R
Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR Major Prin z cosine Minor Prin z cosine Intermed Prin z cosine Zero Shear Angle Major Prin x cosine Minor Prin x cosine Intermed Prin x cosine Major Prin y cosine Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR
Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR Major Prin z cosine Minor Prin z cosine Intermed Prin z cosine Major Prin x cosine Minor Prin x cosine Intermed Prin x cosine Major Prin y cosine Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR
Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR Major Prin z cosine Minor Prin z cosine Intermed Prin z cosine Zero Shear Angle Zero Shear Angle Zero Shear Angle SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label Principal Stress Direction (continued)
Secondary Label Zero Shear Angle Zero Shear Angle Zero Shear Angle Zero Shear Angle Zero Shear Angle Zero Shear Angle
Type SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR
Objects SQDRR TQD4R TQD8R TTR3R TTR6R SQD4XR SQD4R SQD4R SQD4R STETR STETR STETR STETR STETR STETR STX6R STX6R STX6R STX6R SQD8R SQD8R SQD8R SQD8R SHEXR SHEXR SHEXR SHEXR SHEXR SHEXR SPENR SPENR SPENR
Stress Invariants
Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Major Principal Mean Pressure Minor Principal Intermediate Principal Octahedral Shear Von Mises Major Principal Maximum Shear Octahedral Shear Von Mises Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Von Mises Major Principal Mean Pressure Minor Principal Intermediate Principal Octahedral Shear Von Mises Major Principal Mean Pressure Minor Principal
Primary Label Stress Invariants (continued)
Secondary Label Intermediate Principal Octahedral Shear Von Mises Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Von Mises Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Von Mises Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Von Mises Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Von Mises Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Major Principal
Objects SPENR SPENR SPENR STRRR STRRR STRRR STRRR STR6R STR6R STR6R STR6R STR3R STR3R STR3R STR3R SQDRR SQDRR SQDRR SQDRR TQD4R TQD4R TQD4R TQD8R TQD8R TQD8R TTR3R TTR3R TTR3R TTR6R TTR6R TTR6R SQD4XR
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label Stress Invariants (continued)
Secondary Label Minor Principal Maximum Shear Von Mises
Type SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR
Objects SQD4XR SQD4XR SQD4XR EQD4R ETETR ETETR ETETR ETETR ETETR ETETR ETETR ETETR ETETR EQD8R EHEXR EHEXR EHEXR EHEXR EHEXR EHEXR EHEXR EHEXR EHEXR EPENR EPENR EPENR EPENR EPENR EPENR EPENR EPENR EPENR
Principal Strain Direction
Zero Shear Angle Major Prin x cosine Minor Prin x cosine Intermed Prin x cosine Major Prin y cosine Minor Prin y cosine
Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR Major Prin z cosine Minor Prin z cosine Intermed Prin z cosine Zero Shear Angle Major Prin x cosine Minor Prin x cosine Intermed Prin x cosine Major Prin y cosine Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR
Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR Major Prin z cosine Minor Prin z cosine Intermed Prin z cosine Major Prin x cosine Minor Prin x cosine Intermed Prin x cosine Major Prin y cosine Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR
Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR Major Prin z cosine Minor Prin z cosine Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR
Primary Label Principal Strain Direction (continued)
Secondary Label Zero Shear Angle Zero Shear Angle Zero Shear Angle Zero Shear Angle Zero Shear Angle Zero Shear Angle Zero Shear Angle Zero Shear Angle Zero Shear Angle
Objects ETRRR ETR6R ETR3R EQDRR GQD4R GQD8R GTR3R GTR6R EQD4XR EQD4R EQD4R EQD4R ETETR ETETR ETETR ETETR ETETR ETETR EQD8R EQD8R EQD8R EQD8R EHEXR EHEXR EHEXR EHEXR EHEXR EHEXR EPENR EPENR EPENR EPENR
Strain Invariants
Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Major Principal Mean Pressure Minor Principal Intermediate Principal Octahedral Shear Von Mises Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Von Mises Major Principal Mean Pressure Minor Principal Intermediate Principal Octahedral Shear Von Mises Major Principal Mean Pressure Minor Principal Intermediate Principal
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label Strain Invariants (continued)
Secondary Label Octahedral Shear Von Mises Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Von Mises Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Von Mises Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Von Mises Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Von Mises Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Major Principal Minor Principal Maximum Shear Major Principal Minor Principal
Objects EPENR EPENR ETRRR ETRRR ETRRR ETRRR ETR6R ETR6R ETR6R ETR6R ETR3R ETR3R ETR3R ETR3R EQDRR EQDRR EQDRR EQDRR GQD4R GQD4R GQD4R GQD8R GQD8R GQD8R GTR3R GTR3R GTR3R GTR6R GTR6R GTR6R EQD4XR EQD4XR
Primary Label Strain Invariants (continued) Nonlinear Stresses
Secondary Label Maximum Shear Von Mises Stress Tensor Equivalent Stress Stress Tensor Equivalent Stress Stress Tensor Equivalent Stress Stress Tensor Equivalent Stress Stress Tensor Equivalent Stress Stress Tensor Equivalent Stress Stress Tensor Equivalent Stress Stress Tensor Equivalent Stress Stress Tensor Equivalent Stress Stress Tensor Equivalent Stress Stress Tensor Equivalent Stress Stress Tensor Equivalent Stress
Type SCALAR SCALAR TENSOR SCALAR TENSOR SCALAR TENSOR SCALAR TENSOR SCALAR TENSOR SCALAR TENSOR SCALAR TENSOR SCALAR TENSOR SCALAR TENSOR SCALAR TENSOR SCALAR TENSOR SCALAR TENSOR SCALAR ENG_TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR ENG_TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR
Objects EQD4XR EQD4XR NTETR NTETR NTUBR NTUBR NTR3R NTR3R NRODR NRODR NQD4R NQD4R NPENR NPENR NCONR NCONR NHEXR NHEXR NBEMR NBEMR NBEMR NBEMR NBEMR NBEMR NBEMR NBEMR NTETR NTETR NTETR NTUBR NTUBR NTUBR
Nonlinear Strains
Strain Tensor Plastic Strain Creep Strain Strain Tensor Plastic Strain Creep Strain
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label Nonlinear Strains (continued)
Secondary Label Strain Tensor Plastic Strain Creep Strain Strain Tensor Plastic Strain Creep Strain Strain Tensor Plastic Strain Creep Strain Strain Tensor Plastic Strain Creep Strain Strain Tensor Plastic Strain Creep Strain Strain Tensor Plastic Strain Creep Strain Strain Tensor Plastic Strain Creep Strain Strain Tensor Plastic Strain Creep Strain Strain Tensor Plastic Strain Creep Strain Strain Tensor Plastic Strain Creep Strain
Type ENG_TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR ENG_TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR ENG_TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR ENG_TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR ENG_TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR ENG_TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR ENG_TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR ENG_TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR ENG_TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR ENG_TENSOR SCALAR SCALAR
Objects NTR3R NTR3R NTR3R NRODR NRODR NRODR NQD4R NQD4R NQD4R NPENR NPENR NPENR NCONR NCONR NCONR NHEXR NHEXR NHEXR NBEMR NBEMR NBEMR NBEMR NBEMR NBEMR NBEMR NBEMR NBEMR NBEMR NBEMR NBEMR
Primary Label Strain Energy
Secondary Label Energy Percent of Total Energy Density Energy Percent of Total Energy Density Energy Percent of Total Energy Density Energy Percent of Total Energy Density Energy Percent of Total Energy Density Energy Percent of Total Energy Density Energy Percent of Total Energy Density Energy Percent of Total Energy Density Energy Percent of Total Energy Density Energy Percent of Total Energy Density Energy Percent of Total
Objects URODR URODR URODR UBEMR UBEMR UBEMR UTUBR UTUBR UTUBR USHRR USHRR USHRR UCONR UCONR UCONR UELSR UELSR UELSR UDMPR UDMPR UDMPR UQD4R UQD4R UQD4R UBARR UBARR UBARR UGAPR UGAPR UGAPR UTETR UTETR
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label Strain Energy (continued)
Secondary Label Energy Density Energy Percent of Total Energy Density Energy Percent of Total Energy Density Energy Percent of Total Energy Density Energy Percent of Total Energy Density Energy Percent of Total Energy Density Energy Percent of Total Energy Density Energy Percent of Total Energy Density Energy Percent of Total Energy Density
Type SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR TENSOR
Objects UTETR UTX6R UTX6R UTX6R UQD8R UQD8R UQD8R UHEXR UHEXR UHEXR UPENR UPENR UPENR UTRRR UTRRR UTRRR UTR3R UTR3R UTR3R UTR6R UTR6R UTR6R UQDRR UQDRR UQDRR HHEXR, HPENR, HQD4R, HQDXR. HQUDR, HTETR, HTR3R, HTR6R, HTRXR
Cauchy Stresses
Primary Label Logarithmic Strains
Secondary Label
Type TENSOR
Objects HHEXR, HPENR, HQD4R, HQDXR. HQUDR, HTETR, HTR3R, HTR6R, HTRXR HHEXR, HPENR, HQD4R, HQDXR. HQUDR, HTETR, HTR3R, HTR6R, HTRXR HHEXR, HPENR, HQD4R, HQDXR. HQUDR, HTETR, HTR3R, HTR6R, HTRXR
Pressure
TENSOR
Volumetric Strains
TENSOR
CHAPTER
Read Input File
s Review of Read Input File Form s Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File s Conflict Resolution
5.1
Review of Read Input File Form

The Analysis form will appear when the Analysis toggle, located on the MSC.Patran main menu, is chosen.
MSC.Patran
Read Input File as the selected Action on the Analysis form allows much of the model data from a NASTRAN input file to be translated into the MSC.Patran database. A subordinate File Selection form allows the user to specify the NASTRAN input file to translate. This form is described on the following pages.
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
Read Input File Form

This form appears when the Analysis toggle is selected on the main menu. Read Input File, as the selected Action, specifies that model data is to be translated from the specified NASTRAN input file into the MSC.Patran database. Analysis
Action: Object: Method: Code: Type: Read Input File Model Data Translate MSC.Nastran Structural
Indicates the selected Analysis Code and Analysis Type, as defined in the Preferences>Analysis (p. 321) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Available Jobs List of already existing jobs.
Job Name simple Job Description MSC.NASTRAN job created on 30-Jan-93 at 16:05:33 Activates a subordinate Entity Selection form which allows the user to specify the specific card types to be read. Also defines ID offset values to be used during import. Name assigned to current translation job. This job name will be used as the base file name for the message file.
Entity Selection... Select Input File...
Activates a subordinate File Select form which allows the user to specify the NASTRAN input file to be translated.
Apply
Entity Selection Form

This subordinate form appears when the Entity Selection button is selected on the Analysis form and Read Input File is the selected Action. It allows the user to specify which MSC Nastran entity types to import. Entity Selection
Entity Packets Nodes Elements Material Properties Element Properties Coordinate Frames Load Sets Subcases MPC Data
Highlighted entity types will be imported.
Select None Select All Select All FEM Select All LBC
Activates the form to define ID offsets. Define Offsets...
Reset OK Cancel
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
The following table shows the relation between the entity types listed above and the actual MSC Nastran card types effected. If an entity type is filtered out, it is treated as if those cards did not exist in the original input file. Entity Type Nodes Elements GRID, GRDSET, SPOINT BAROR, BEAMOR, CBAR, CBEAM, CBEND, CDAMP1, CDAMP2, CDAMP3, CDAMP4, CELAS1, CELAS2, CELAS3, CELAS4, CGAP, CHEXA, CMASS1, CMASS2, CMASS3, CMASS4, CONM1, CONM2, CONROD, CPENTA, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUADR, CROD, CSHEAR, CTETRA, CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CTRIAR, CTRIAX6, CTUBE, CVISC, PLOTEL MAT1, MAT2, MAT3, MAT8, MAT9 PBAR, PBCOMP, PBEAM, PBEND, PCOMP, PDAMP, PELAS, PGAP, PMASS, PROD, PSHEAR, PSHELL, PSOLID, PTUBE, PVISC CORD1C, CORD1R, CORD1S, CORD2C, CORD2R, CORD2S FORCE, GRAV,MOMENT, PLOAD1, PLOAD2, PLOAD4, PLOADX1, RFORCE, TEMP, TEMPP1, TEMPRB, SPC, SPC1, SPCD LOAD, SPCADD, Case Control Section MPC, RBAR, RBE1, RBE2, RBE3, RROD, RSPLINE, RTRPLT MSC.Nastran Cards
Material Properties Element Properties Coordinate Frames Load Sets Subcases MPC Data
It should be noted that since the GRID card is controlled with the Nodes filter, the grid.ps load set with the permanent single point constraint data will also be controlled by the Nodes filter.
Define Offsets Form

This subordinate form appears when the Define Offsets button is selected on the Entity Selection form. It allows the user to specify the ID offsets used when reading a NASTRAN input file.
If selected, the value in the Maximum column will be used as the offset for the selected rows. Minimum and Maximum IDs currently found in the MSC.Patran database.
Entity Label Offset Definition

Input Offset Value Automatic Offset Define Label Offsets for Selected Entities: Entity Existing ID Range in Db Minimum Nodes Elements Material Properties Element Properties Coordinate Frames Distributed Load Set IDs Node Force Load Set IDs Node Displacement Set IDs Bar element Init Displacement 1 1 Maximum 200 200 ID offset value to be used during import. The new ID value will be the ID found in the NASTRAN input file plus this offset value. New ID Offset All offset data boxes can be selected at once by selecting this column header.
Reset
OK
Cancel
All references made in the input file will also be offset. If a node references a particular CID as its analysis frame, then the reference will be offset as well. If the coordinate frame is defined in the same input file, the proper references should be maintained. The preference will be properly maintained. If the coordinate frame existed in the file prior to the import, then it needs to be the offset CID. If a coordinate frame with that CID is not found in the database, an error message will be issued. To determine which offset effects a particular MSC Nastran card type, refer to the table in the previous section. For MSC.Patran entities identified by integer IDs (nodes, elements, coordinate frames, and MPCs), the offset value is simply added to the MSC Nastran ID to generate the MSC.Patran ID. For MSC.Patran entities identified by text names (materials, element properties, load sets, and load cases), the offset value is first added to the MSCNastran ID. The new integer value is then used to generate the MSC.Patran name per the naming conventions described in later sections.
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
Selection of Input File

This subordinate form appears when the Select Input File button is selected on the Analysis form and Read Input File is the selected Action. It allows the user to specify which NASTRAN input file to translate. Select File
Filter /bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/*.bdf Directories Files ids.bdf ids_1.bdf
/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/.
/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/.. /bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/clip
north.bdf
Selected Input File /bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/north.bdf
OK
Filter
Cancel
Summary Data Form

This form appears after the import of the NASTRAN input file has completed. It displays the number of entities imported correctly, imported with warnings, or not imported due to errors. These figures reflect the number of MSC.Patran entities created. In some cases, there is not a oneto-one relation between the original MSC .Nastran entities and the generated MSC.Patran entities. For example, when material orientations on several CQUAD4s are defined using references to varying MCIDs while still referencing the same PID, MSC.Patran needs to create a unique property set for each different MCID reference. When the OK button is selected, the newly imported data will be committed to the MSC.Patran database, and can not be undone. If there is any question as to whether or not this import was desired, review the graphics data prior to selecting OK on this form. If the import was not correct, select the undo button on the main menu bar before selecting OK on this form.
NASTRAN Input File Import Summary

Imported Nodes Elements Coordinate Frames Materials Element Properties Load Sets Load Cases MPCs Imported with Warning Not Imported
Reject Cards...
OK
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
Reject Card Form

During import of the NASTRAN input file, some cards types might not be understood by MSC.Patran. Those cards are brought into MSC.Patran in the direct text input data boxes. Selecting the Reject Cards button on the Summary Data form will bring up this Reject Card Form. You can review these cards here.
Direct Text Import Bulk Data Section

$ $CBEAM MPCADD 215 100 101 213 102 214 0. 0. 1.
x File Management Section x x Executive Control Section x

OK
x Case Control Section x x Bulk Data Section
Only card types not supported by MSC.Patran are sent to the reject card blocks. (This includes comments.) Cards which are otherwise recognized, but can not be imported due to syntax or invalid data errors are not sent to the reject blocks. The rejected cards will have no characters in front of the command name. Commands preceeded by the character $> are used by the MSC/AMS product to allow processing of comment lines.
5.2
Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File

The following sections describe which specific MSC .Nastran card types can currently be read into MSC.Patran. The MSC .Nastran cards described in this document are the only cards read when importing a NASTRAN input file into MSC.Patran. All non-supported cards will be sent to the appropriate Direct Text Input data box for this job. When errors occur during the import of a supported card type, the card being processed may or may not be imported, depending on the severity of the problem encountered. An error message will be presented regardless of whether or not the offending card is actually imported. Any references from supported cards to cards that were not imported (either due to not being a supported card type or due to serious import errors) will still be attempted. If this reference is required in MSC.Patran for the card currently being processed, it too will fail to import. For example, if there is a serious error on a GRID card which causes it to not imported, then all elements attached to that GRID will also fail to import. Partial Decks. This MSC.Patran function can read incomplete MSC. Nastran decks (except where explicitly noted). However, if the BEGIN BULK command is missing, the program can get confused when trying to determine if a particular card belongs to the case control or bulk data. If you experience any difficulties importing a file that does not have a BEGIN BULK command, add one to the top of the file. This should avoid any such confusion.
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
Coordinate Systems
The following coordinate system definitions can be read into MSC.Patran. Command CORD1C CORD1R CORD1S CORD2C CORD2R CORD2S Comments References to the GRIDs on these cards are lost. The locations of the referenced GRIDs are extracted, and those locations are used to create the MSC.Patran definition. References to RIDs are lost. The specified locations are converted to global cartesian for use in the MSC.Patran definitions. The original B and C points are not retained. Their values are recomputed when a new NASTRAN input file is created. The definition will be equivalent, but not identical.
Referential Integrity. Coordinate systems and GRIDs which are referenced as part of a CORD definition must be in the same input file. If these are not found in the input file, the definition will be rejected. References to coordinate frames other than for new coordinate frame definitions can be resolved with coordinate frames previously found in the MSC.Patran database. Chaining. Due to limitations in the MSC.Patran definitions of coordinate systems, chained definitions (definitions based on other coordinate systems or grids) are modified during import. The resulting definitions are equivalent in global space, but are based on global cartesian coordinates rather than GRID references or coordinate locations in other systems. This change is carried through when a new NASTRAN input file is created. All coordinate systems will be created using CORD2 type definitions, and they will all reference global cartesian coordinates. These definitions will be different from, but equivalent to, the original definitions.
Grids and SPOINTs

The MSC .Nastran GRID card is read fully, except the SEID field. The CD and CP references are both maintained. The PS data is used to create a constraint set. The details of the created load set are defined in the load set import section. GRDSET data is merged into the GRID data during import. The data will be retained, but will appear directly on the GRID card when a new NASTRAN input file is generated. SPOINTs. SPOINTs are treated as GRIDs at the global origin. They are assumed to have their GRID CD and CP fields set to the basic system, and their PS field is set to permanently constrain degrees-of-freedom 2 through 6. Referential Integrity. Coordinate frames referenced in the CP field must exist in the same input file. Coordinate frames referenced on the CD field can exist in either the same input file, or the MSC.Patran database prior to the import.
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
Elements and Element Properties

The following MSC .Nastran elements and element properties can be read into MSC.Patran. Property Set Name pbar.<pid>
Element CBAR
Property PBAR
Comments Orientation and offset vectors are re-defined in global cartesian during import. (See BAROR comments below.)
PBARL CBARAO CBEAM
pbarl.<pid> New property sets are created for each occurrence of a CBAR card referenced by a CBARAO card Orientation and offset vectors are re-defined in global cartesian during import. (See BEAMOR comments below.)
PBEAM PBEAML PBCOMP
pbeam.<pid> pbeaml.<pid> pbcomp.<pid> The MSC .Nastran documentation describes how the section data is used to create a complete set of lumped areas. The data imported into MSC.Patran is fully expanded, and therefore, is different from the data in the original input file. This definition is, however, fully equivalent to the original. The SO field is not currently supported. A YES is provided automatically when a new NASTRAN input file is created. Only the lumped areas definition is understood, If a uniform cross section is defined here, it will be converted to a lumped area definition, but no lumped areas will be defined. MSC.Patran only understands the GEOM = 1 orientation data. If other definitions are found, a vector will be computed to convert the definition to the GEOM = 1 format. If a GRID was referenced for GEOM other than 1, that reference will be lost. For the same reasons, the THETAB and RB data will also be lost since that data is not used for GEOM = 1 definitions. Orientation and offset vectors are re-defined in global cartesian during import.
CBEND
PBEND
pbend_g.<pid> pbend_p.<pid>
If standard cross section properties are found on the PBEND card If the alternate format of the PBEND is used to define a pipe cross section.
Element CBUSH
Property PBUSH
Property Set Name pbush.<pid> pbush_g.<pid>
Comments
The grounded form of the PBUSH
PBUSHT CDAMP1 PDAMP
pbusht_1D.<pid> pdamp.<pid> pdamp_g.<pid> For dampers connecting 2 GRIDs. For grounded dampers attached to a single GRID. For dampers connecting 2 GRIDs. For grounded dampers attached to a single GRID. Treated identical to the CDAMP1 and CDAMP2 elements with the degree-of-freedom fields set to 1 (UX). pelas.<pid> pelas_g.<pid> For springs connecting 2 GRIDs. For grounded springs attached to a single GRID. For springs connecting 2 GRIDs. For grounded springs attached to a single GRID. Treated identical to the CELAS1 and CELAS2 elements with the degree-of-freedom fields set to 1 (UX). Orientation and offset vectors are re-defined in global cartesian during import.
CDAMP2
cdamp2 cdamp2_g
CDAMP3 CDAMP4 CELAS1
PDAMP
PELAS
CELAS2
celas2 celas2_g
CELAS3 CELAS4 CGAP
PELAS
PGAP
pgap.<pid> pgap_a.<pid>
For non-adaptive definitions on the PGAP card. For adaptive definitions on the PGAP card. Note: The BDYOR command that may contain default values for CHBDY elements is not currently supported.
CHBDYG CHBDYP CHEXA CMASS1
PHBDY
PSOLID PMASS
psolid.<pid> pmass.<pid> pmass_g.<pid> For masses connecting 2 GRIDs. For masses attached to a single GRID. For masses connecting 2 GRIDs. For masses attached to a single GRID. Treated identical to the CMASS1 and CMASS2 elements with the degree-of-freedom fields set to 1 (UX). conm1 conm2 conrod
CMASS2
cmass2 cmass2_g
CMASS3 CMASS4 CONM1 CONM2 CONROD
PMASS
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
Element CPENTA CQUAD4
Property PSOLID PSHELL PCOMP
Property Set Name psolid.<pid> pshell.<pid> pcomp.<pid>
Comments
(See PSHELL comments below.) A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and referenced. The SB and FT fields are currently not read. (See PSHELL comments below.) A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and referenced. The SB and FT fields are currently not read. (See PSHELL comments below.) A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and referenced. The SB and FT fields are currently not read.
CQUAD8
PSHELL PCOMP
pshell.<pid> pcomp.<pid>
CQUADR
PSHELL PCOMP
pshellr.<pid> pcompr.<pid>
CROD CSHEAR CTETRA CTRIA3
PROD PSHEAR PSOLID PSHELL PCOMP
prod.<pid> pshear.<pid> psolid.<pid> pshell.<pid> pcomp.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.) A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and referenced. The SB and FT fields are currently not read. (See PSHELL comments below.) A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and referenced. The SB and FT fields are currently not read. (See PSHELL comments below.) A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and referenced. The SB and FT fields are currently not read.
CTRIA6
PSHELL PCOMP
pshell.<pid> pcomp.<pid>
CTRIAR
PSHELL PCOMP
pshellr.<pid> pcompr.<pid>
CTRIAX6 CTUBE CVISC PLOTEL PTUBE PVISC
ctriax6 ptube.<pid> pvisc.<pid> Creates the connectivity only. These elements are not assigned to any property set region. PLOTEL cards will not be written when a new input file is created. Tapered tubes are converted to an equivalent constant section definition.
Higher order elements (CQUAD8, CTRIA6, CTRIAX6, CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA) will generate linear elements in MSC.Patran if none of the mid-edge nodes are specified. PSHELL Properties. PSHELL properties can be imported as any one of five MSC.Patran property types. The MID1, MID2, MID3, 12I/T3, and TS/T property fields are used to determine which one to choose. If MID2 is -1 and MID3 is 0, then a Plane Strain property set is used. If MID2 and MID3 are both 0, then a Membrane property set is chosen. If MID1 and MID3 are 0, then a Bending property set is used. If MID1, MID2, and MID3 are all the same, and the MSC .Nastran defaults are used for 12I/T3 and TS/T, then a Homogeneous property set is used. If all else fails, then an Equivalent Section property set is chosen. BAROR and BEAMOR Definitions. The BAROR and BEAMOR data is merged onto the CBAR and CBEAM cards using the proper MSC .Nastran conventions. The data is treated as if it had originally been defined on the CBAR and CBEAM cards. When a new NASTRAN input file is created, the data will remain with the CBAR and CBEAM cards. No BAROR or BEAMOR cards are generated. Fields. If a field is required to store varying data, the field will have the same name as the property set, with the name of the specific property word appended to it. For example, if property set pshell.101 has a varying thickness, the field will be named pshell.101.Thickness. Referential Integrity. Nodes and coordinate frames referenced on elements or element properties must exist, but they do not need to be in the input file. They could also have been defined in the MSC.Patran database prior to the import. If a material is referenced, but can not be found, a new material with no properties will be created. A message will be issued indicating the creation of this material. If an element property set is referenced, but can not be found, a new property set with no properties will be created. A message will be issued indicating the creation of this property set. Set Name Extensions. In some cases, the data found on the element can not be defined in MSC.Patran in a single property set. In those cases, multiple property sets will be created to define the distinct definitions. The table below defines extensions to the Property Set Names shown in the previous table. If the values on the specified field changes, a new property set with the indicated extension will be created.
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
If all elements which reference a single PID can be stored in a single property set, then no extension will be added to the Property Set Name. Element CBAR CBEAM Field PA PB SA SB PA PB C1 C2 Extension .pa<PA> .pb<PB> .sa<SA> .sb<SB> .pa<PA> .pb<PB> .ca<C1> .cb<C2> Comments
CDAMP1, CDAMP2, CELAS1, CELAS2, CMASS1, CMASS2 CDAMP3, CDAMP4, CELAS3, CELAS4, CMASS3, CMASS4 CGAP, CONM1, CONM2 CONROD, CTRIAX6 CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUADR, CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CTRIAR
C1 C2
.ca1 .cb1
These are automatically treated as component 1 (X translation).
CID MID MCID
.c<CID> .m<MID> .c<MCID>
Materials
The following MSC .Nastran material definitions can be read into MSC.Patran. Material Type CREEP MAT1 mat1.<mid> The MCSID field is not currently supported. If the G field is blank in the input file, the MSC .Nastran default value will be filled in during import. Material Name Comments
MATT1 MAT2 MATT2 MAT3 MATT3 mat3.<mid> mat2.<mid> The MCSID field is not currently supported.
Material Type MAT4 MATT4 MAT5 MATT5 MAT8 MAT9 MATT9
Material Name
Comments
mat8.<mid> mat9.<mid>
MPCs
The following MSC . Nastran MPC and rigid element definitions can be read into MSC.Patran. Card Type MPC MPC Type Explicit Comments Unique MPC IDs will be assigned to these entities. Since MSC.Patran uses a slightly different basis MPC equation, the equation coefficients (Ai) will probably be scaled by a constant multiplier during import. The resulting equation will be equivalent, but not necessarily identical to the original definition in the NASTRAN input file.
RBAR RBE1 RBE2
RBAR RBE1 RBE2 Fixed
RBE3 RROD RSPLINE RSSCON RTRPLT
RBE3 RROD RSPLINE RSSCON RTRPLT
MPCs in MSC.Patran are treated as elements and are not associated to load cases. As a result, all SUBCASE related data is lost. The MPCs are simply imported into the model and are no longer associated to a specific load case. MPCs can reference SPOINTs instead of GRIDs. If this is detected, the corresponding component field will be set to 1 (UX) to be consistent with the import of SPOINTs. The MPCADD command is not read since the MPCs are simply imported and no associated to a load case. The SID references on the MPC card are also lost for the same reason. New MPC IDs are assigned to these elements during import.
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
Load Sets
The following MSC .Nastran Loads and Boundary Condition definitions can be read into MSC.Patran. Card Type FORCE GRAV MOMENT PLOAD1 LBC Set Name force.<sid> grav.<sid> moment.<sid> pload1.<sid> Only PLOAD1s applied to the entire length of an element can be read. If a load is applied only to a portion of an element, the load will be ignored, and a message will be presented indicating the problem. Comments
PLOAD2 PLOAD4
pload2.<sid> pload4.<sid> Only pressure loads normal to the surface can be imported. If a surface traction is detected, it will be ignored, and a message will be presented indicating the problem.
PLOADX1 CONV PCONV CONVM PCONVM QBDYi QVECT QVOL RADBC RADCAV
ploadx1.<sid> conv.<pid>
convm.<pid>
qbdyi.<pid> qvect.<pid> qvol.<pid> radbc.<pid> radcav.<pid> Note: ELEAMB field is not supported by MSC.Patran. The ambient element is added to the application region.
RADM RADMT RFORCE rforce.<sid> If the G point is not at the origin of the referenced CID, a new CID will be created and referenced. The METHOD field is not read. It is automatically set to 1 when writing a new file.
SLOAD TEMP
sload.<pid> temp.<sid>
Card Type TEMPP1
LBC Set Name tempp1.<sid>
Comments Only the average temperature and effective linear gradient data fields are used. The specified temperatures at the Z1 and Z2 locations are ignored. Only the average temperature and effective linear gradient data fields are used. The specified temperatures at the stress recovery locations are ignored.
TEMPRB
temprb.<sid>
GRID SPC SPCADD SPC1 SPCD
grid.ps spc.<sid>
spc1.<sid> spcd.<sid> The required SPC or SPC1 entries for the same Degree-of-Freedom are removed from the load case when a SPCD is found. They will automatically be re-generated when a new input file is created.
VIEW VIEW3D Fields. If a field is required to store varying data, the field will have the same name as the load set, with the name of the specific data word appended to it. For example, if load set force.101 has a varying force magnitude, the field will be named force.101.Force. Load cases are created in MSC.Patran from the SUBCASE definitions in the NASTRAN input file. Load sets not referenced by a SUBCASE definition are created as load sets in MSC.Patran, but are not associated to a load case. Load sets defined above the first SUBCASE command, plus any permanent single point constraint sets from the GRID cards, are associated to all load cases created during this import. If there is no case control data, then load sets will be created, but they will not be assigned to any load cases. The SPCADD and LOAD cards are used in creating load cases in MSC.Patran, but the SID of these cards is lost. The SIDs on the individual SPCx, FORCE, MOMENT, GRAV, PLOADx, RFORCE, and TEMPx cards are used in creating the names of the load sets. The name for the created load cases is derived from the subtitle of the SUBCASE. This is done for consistency with the forward PAT3NAS translation. A job is created during the import. The name of the created job is the basename of the file being read. MSC .Nastran allows load sets to be referenced in multiple places with different scale factors. This is not possible in MSC.Patran. Therefore, in some cases, multiple copies of the same load set need to be created with the only difference being the scale factor. The name of these load sets are modified to include the subcase ID to create unique names.
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
TABLES
The following table types are supported during import of a NASTRAN input file. Note that some forms of the table commands are converted to an equivalent version supported by Patran. Card Type TABLED1 TABLED2 TABLED3 TABLEM1 TABLEM2 TABLEM3 Field Name Field.<tid> Field.<tid> Field.<tid> Field.<tid> Field.<tid> Field.<tid> Converted to an equivalent TABLEM1 when read into MSC.Patran by NIFIMP. Converted to an equivalent TABLEM1 when read into MSC.Patran by NIFIMP. Converted to an equivalent TABLED1 when read into MSC.Patran by NIFIMP. Converted to an equivalent TABLED1 when read into MSC.Patran by NIFIMP. Comments
5.3
Conflict Resolution
If an entity can not be imported into MSC.Patran because another entity already exists with that ID or name, then the conflict resolution logic is used. There are 2 different approaches taken, depending on whether the entity is identified by an ID or by a name.
Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by IDs

If a new definition conflicts with a definition already in the MSC.Patran database, you will be asked if you want the ID of the new definition offset. If you select YES, a new ID will be chosen. If you select YES FOR ALL, a new ID will be chosen for this definition, as well as for any others found to be in conflict. In this case, then all references to the ID in the original MSC.Patran database will still reference the old ID, but references to the ID from within the input file will be altered to reference the new ID. If you do not want the CID to be offset, then you will be asked if you want the new definition to overwrite the existing definition. If this is done, then all references to this ID from both the original MSC.Patran database and the input file will be referencing the same ID. The definition for that ID will be either the old or the new definition, depending on how this second question is answered.
Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by Names

The user is not asked what to do in cases where the conflicting entities are identified by names. The name for the new entity will be modified by appending an extension to the name. The new name will be <old name>.r<n>. The value of n is chosen to make the new name unique. No merging of data or application regions is done. The old definition is left unchanged.
CHAPTER
Delete
s Review of Delete Form s Deleting an MSC.Nastran Job
6.1
Review of Delete Form

The Analysis form will appear when the Analysis toggle, located on the MSC.Patran main form, is chosen and the selected Action is Delete.
MSC.Patran
The Delete option under Action allows the user to delete jobs that have been created for the MSC.Nastran preference. Analysis
Action: Object: Delete Job
Code: Type:
MSC.Nastran Structural
Delete Jobs
CHAPTER 6
Delete
6.2
Deleting an MSC.Nastran Job

This format of the Analysis form appears when the Action is set to Delete. The user may delete job definitions that were created for the MSC.Nastran preference with this form. Analysis
Action: Object: Delete Job
Code: Type:
MSC.Nastran Structural Indicates the selected Analysis Code and Analysis Type, as defined in the Preferences>Analysis (p. 321) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Existing Jobs
List of already existing jobs. Select the jobs that are to be deleted.
Deletes the jobs selected in the Existing Jobs listbox. Apply
CHAPTER
Files
s Files
7.1
Files
The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface uses or creates several files.The following table outlines each file and its uses. In the file name definition, jobname will be replaced with the jobname assigned by the user. File Name Description This is the MSC.Patran database. During an analyze pass, model data is read from this database and, during a Read Results pass, model and/or results data is written into it. This file typically resides in the current directory. These are small files used to pass certain information between MSC.Patran and the independent translation programs during translation. There should never be a need to directly alter these files. These files typically reside in the current directory. This is the NASTRAN input file created by the interface. This file typically resides in the current directory. These are a series of MSC.Nastran alters that are read during forward translation. These alters instruct MSC.Nastran to write information to the OUTPUT2 file that the results translation will be looking for. The forward translator searches the MSC.Patran file path for these files, but they typically reside in the <installation_directory>/alters directory. If these files do not meet specific needs, edit them accordingly. However, the naming conversion of msc_v# <version #>_sol#<solution #>.alt must be preserved. Either place the edited file back into the <installation_directory>/alters directory or in any directory on the MSC.Patran file path, which takes precedence over the <installation_directory>/alters directory. If these files are not used, remove them from the MSC.Patran file path, rename them, or delete them altogether. This is the MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2 file, which is read by the Read Results pass. This file typically resides in the current directory and contains both model and results data. It is created by placing a PARAM,POST,-1 in the input deck. This is the MSC.Nastran XDB file or MSC.Access database, which is attached by the Read Results pass. This file typically resides in the current directory and contains results data. It is created by placing a PARAM, POST,0 in the input deck. This file may be generated during a Read Results pass. If the results translation cannot write data directly into the specified MSC.Patran database it will create this jobname flat file. This file typically resides in the current directory.
*.db
jobname.jbr
jobname.bdf msc_v#_sol#.alt
jobname.op2
jobname.xdb
jobname.flat
CHAPTER 7
Files
File Name jobname.msg.xx
Description These message files contain any diagnostic output from the translation, either forward or reverse. This file typically resides in the current directory. This is a UNIX script file, which is called on to submit MSC.Nastran after translation is complete. This file might need customizing with site specific data, such as, host machine name and MSC.Nastran executable commands. This file contains many comments and should be easy to edit. MSC.Patran searches its file path to find this file, but it typically resides in the <installation_directory> bin/exe directory. Either use the general copy in <installation_directory>/bin/exe, or place a local copy in a directory on the file path, which takes precedence over the <installation_directory>/bin/exe directory.
MscNastranExecute
CHAPTER
Errors/Warnings
s Errors/Warnings
8.1
Errors/Warnings
There are many error or warning messages that may be generated by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Interface. The following table outlines some of these. Message Unable to open a new message file " ". Translation messages will be written to standard output. Description If the translation tries to open a message file and cannot, it will write messages to Standard Output. On most systems, the translator automatically writes messages to standard output and never tries to create a separate message file. The OUTPUT2 file was not found. Check the OUTPUT2 file specification in the translation control file. The OUTPUT2 file is not in standard binary format. Check the OUTPUT2 file specification in the translation control file. The name of a nonexistent group was specified in the translator control file. No model data will be translated from the OUTPUT2 file. The translation control file must be specified as the first on-line argument to the translator.
Unable to open the specified OUTPUT2 file " ". The specified OUTPUT2 file " " is not in standard binary format and cannot be translated. Group " " does not exist in the database. Model data will not be translated. Needed file specification missing! The full name of the job file must be specified as the first command-line argument to this program. Unable to open the specified database " ". Writing the OUTPUT2 information to the PCL command file " ". Unable to open either the specified database " ", or a PCL command file, " ". Unable to open the NASTRAN input file " ". Unable to open the specified database, " ". Alter file of the name " " could not be found. No OUPUT2 alter will be written to the NASTRAN input file. No property regions are defined in the database. No elements or element properties can be translated.
If the translator cannot communicate directly to the specified database. It will write the results and/or model data to a PCL session file. The naspat3 translator is unable to open any output file. Check file specification and directory protection. The translator was unable to open a file to where the input file information will be written. The forward MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran translator was unable to open the specified MSC.Patran database. The OUTPUT2 DMAP alter file, for this type of analysis, could not be found. Correct the search path to include the necessary directory if you want the alter files to be written to the input file. Elements referenced by an element property region in the MSC.Patran database will not get translated by the forward MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran translator. If no element regions are defined, no elements will be translated.
CHAPTER

s Software Components in MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran s MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Components s Configuring the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Execute File
A.1
Software Components in MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran

The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran product includes the following items:
A PCL function contained in p3patran.plb that will add MSC.Nastran specific

definitions to any MSC.Patran database (not already containing such definitions) at any time.
A PCL library called mscnastran.plb and contained in the <installation_directory>

directory. This library is used by the analysis forms to produce forms for analysis code specific translation parameter, solution parameter, etc.
A script file called MscNastranExecute, contained in the

<installation_directory>/bin/exe directory. This script controls the operation of the interface and the submission of MSC.Nastran analyses. This script can be run independent of MSC.Patran but typically run from within MSC.Patran, transparent to the user.
Several MSC.Nastran alter files are included. These files are used when creating the
NASTRAN input file. They ask MSC.Nastran to produce the results file required by the NASPAT3 results translator. These files can be found in the <installation_directory>/alter directory. They must follow the naming convention msc_v<version_number>_sol<solution_number>.alt. For example, msc_v67_sol3.alt. If these files do not meet the users needs, they should be modified. Alter files specific to LMS CADA-X are also included. These files are identical to the standard alter files except for an additional .lms extension, e.g., msc_v67_sol3.alt.lms. These files are usually needed only when the user requires support for older solution sequences.
This MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Interface Manual is included as part of the product. An

on-line version is also provided to allow the direct access to this information from within MSC.Patran.
CHAPTER A
A.2
MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Components

The diagrams shown below indicate how the functions, scripts, programs, and files that constitute the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface affect the MSC.Patran environment. Site customization, in some cases, is indicated. Figure A-1 shows the process of running an analysis. The mscnastran.plb library defines the Translation Parameter, Solution Type, Solution Parameter, and Output Request forms called by the Analysis form. When the Apply button is pushed on the Analyze form, the interface process is initiated. The interface reads data from the database and creates the NASTRAN input file. Status messages from the interface are recorded in the MSC.Patran session file. A series of MSC.Nastran alter files is provided. They may be used during the creation of the input file depending upon the selected solution type and solution parameters. These alter files are mostly used in support of older solution sequences. If the interface successfully produces a NASTRAN input file, and the user requests it, the MscNastranExecute script will then start MSC.Nastran.
MSC. Pa tr a n Analysis mscnastran.plb Analyze
p3patran.plb
MscNastranExecute MSC. Pat ra n Database Alter Library
jobname.bdf
MSC.Nastran
Figure A-1 Forward Translation
Figure A-2 shows the process of reading information from an MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2 file. When the Apply button is selected on the Read Output2 form, a <jobname>.jbr file is created and the results translation is started. The results interface process reads the data from the MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2 file and stores the results in the MSC.Patran database. Status messages from the interface are recorded in the MSC.Patran session file. p3patran.plb MSC. P at ra n Analysis Read Output2
mscnastran.plb
jobname.jbr MSC. Pat ra n database
MSC.Nastran
jobname.OP2
Figure A-2 OUTPUT2 File Translation
CHAPTER A
Figure A-3 shows the process of translating information from a NASTRAN input file into a MSC.Patran database. The behavior of the main Analysis/Read Input File form and the subordinate file select form is dictated by the mscnastran.plb PCL library. The Apply button on the main form activates the input file reader program, which reads the specified NASTRAN input file. MSC. Pa t ra n p3patran.plb Analysis Read Input File mscnastran.plb
MSC. Pat ra n database
MSC.Nastran Input File Reader
NASTRAN Input File input_file_name.error.* Figure A-3 NASTRAN Input File Translation
A.3
Configuring the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Execute File

During the installation of the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran analysis preference, the mscsetup utility creates a default site_setup file in the installation directory. This file sets environment variables relating to MSC.Patran. To custom configure this site_setup file consult Environment Variables (p. 94) in the MSC.Patran Installation and Operations Guide.
I
I N D E X MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide Volume 1: Structural Analysis
MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide Volume 1: Structural Analysis
A
alternate reduction, 183, 257 ALTERS, 344 Alters, 176 ALTRED, 183, 257 analysis coordinate frames, 17 analysis form, 173 analysis job definition, 175 analysis job submittal, 175 analysis preferences, 6 analyze, 172 AUTOSPC, 183
B
buckling, 194 bulk data, 9 bulk data file, 312
CQUAD8, 111, 116, 118, 125, 131, 135 CQUADR, 127 creep, 52, 53 CROD, 98, 99 CSHEAR, 139 CTETRA, 140 CTRIA3, 111, 114, 116, 118, 122, 125, 128, 131, 135 CTRIA6, 111, 116, 118, 125, 131, 135 CTRIAR, 113, 117, 120, 127, 132, 136 CTRIAX6, 130 CTUBE, 100 CVISC, 103 CYAX, 32 cyclic symmetry, 21, 32, 183, 194, 203, 257 CYJOIN, 32 CYSYM, 32
D
degrees-of-freedom, 22 DISPLACEMENT, 235 displacements, 155, 158 distributed load, 155 dynamic reduction, 188, 193 DYNRED, 193
C
case control, 8 CBAR, 77 CBEAM, 80, 88, 90 CBEND, 84, 86 CDAMP1, 73, 102 CELAS1, 72, 101 CGAP, 104 CHEXA, 140 CMASS1, 69, 106 complex Eigenvalue, 198 CONM1, 67 CONM2, 70 coordinate frames, 15, 284 analysis, 17 reference, 17 coordinates, 177 COUPMASS, 184, 190 CPENTA, 140 CQUAD4, 111, 113, 114, 116, 117, 118, 120, 122, 125, 128, 131, 132, 135, 136
E
ECHO, 184 EIGB, 196 EIGC, 201 Eigenvalue extraction, 188, 194 buckling, 196 complex, 201 real, 191 EIGR, 191 EIGRL, 196 elastoplastic, 46, 47, 48, 49 element properties, 63
INDEX
elements, 284 2d solid, 131, 132 axisymmetric solid, 130 coupled point mass, 67 curved general section, 84 curved pipe, 86 gap, 104 general section beam, 77 general section rod, 98, 99 general section(cbeam), 93 grounded scalar damper, 73 grounded scalar mass, 69 grounded scalar spring, 72 lumped area beam, 88 lumped point mass, 70 p-formulation, 11, 141 P-Formulation bending panel, 128 P-Formulation Equivalent Section plate, 122 P-Formulation general section beam, 80 P-Formulation homogeneous plate, 114 P-Formulation Membrane, 137 P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid, 133 pipe section, 100 plotel, 107 revised bending panel, 127 revised equivalent section plate, 120 revised homogeneous plate, 113 revised laminate plate, 117 revised membrane, 136 revised plane strain solid, 132 scalar damping, 102 scalar mass, 106 scalar spring, 101 shear panel, 139 solid, 140 standard bending panel, 125 standard equivalent section plate, 118 standard homogeneous plate, 111 standard laminate plate, 116 standard membrane, 135 standard plane strain solid, 131 tapered beam, 90 viscous damper, 103 ELSDCON, 235 errors, 342 ESE, 235 executive control, 8
F
failure, 55, 56, 57 criteria, 50, 51 FEEDGE, 11 FEFACE, 12 files, 338 finite elements, 16, 18 FMS, 8 follower forces, 186 FORCE, 159, 235 force, 155, 159 formats, 177 frequency response, 203
G
GEOM1, 284 GEOM2, 284 GMBC, 12 GPFORCE, 235 GRAV, 163 GRDPNT, 185, 190
I
INCLUDE files, 177 inertia relief, 183, 257 inertial load, 163 initial conditions, 155, 164 initial load, 155 initial velocity, 155 input file, 312 INREL, 183, 257 iterations static nonlinear, 216
K
K6ROT, 184
L
large displacements, 186 LGDISP, 187 linear static, 183 linear surf-vol, 19 linear transient, 206 load cases, 167 loads and boundary conditions, 153
INDEX
M
MAT1, 50, 51 MAT3, 58 MAT8, 54, 55, 56, 57 materials, 36 2D anisotropic, 39, 59 2D orthotropic, 39, 54 3D anisotropic, 40, 60 3D orthotropic, 39, 58 composite, 41, 61 isotropic, 38, 42 MATS1, 43, 46, 47, 48, 49 MATT1, 50 MAXLINES, 184 model data, 273 MOMENT, 159 MPC, 19, 23, 33 MSC.Access, 176, 270 MSC.Nastran version, 177, 273 multi-point constraints, 19
OUTRCV, 13
P
PARAM, SNORM, 184, 190, 199, 204, 207 PBAR, 77 PBCOMP, 88 PBEAM, 80, 90 PBEND, 84, 86 PCOMP, 51, 56, 57, 61, 116, 117 PDAMP, 73, 102 PELAS, 72, 101 PGAP, 104 PLOAD4, 159 PLOADX1, 159 PMASS, 69, 106 POINT, 11 preferences, 6 pressure, 155, 159 PROD, 98 properties, 63 PSHEAR, 139 PSHELL, 111, 113, 118, 120, 125, 127, 131, 132, 135, 136 PSOLID, 140 PTUBE, 100 PVISC, 103
N
NLLOAD, 235 NLPARM, 216 nodes, 17, 177, 284 nonlinear elastic, 43 nonlinear statics, 186 nonlinear transient, 209 normal nodes, 188 numbering options, 178
R
RBAR, 20, 25 RBE1, 20, 26 RBE2, 20, 24, 27 RBE3, 20, 28 read input file, 312 reference coordinate frames, 17 results, 270, 271, 274 supported entities, 277, 285 RFORCE, 163 RROD, 21, 29 RSPLINE, 21, 30 RSSCON, 19 RTRPLT, 21, 31
O
OEF1, 277, 278 OESNL1, 278 OLOAD, 235 ONRGY1, 279 OPG1, 280 OPHIG, 280 OPNL1, 280 optimize, 254 optimization parameters, 255 subcase create, 256 subcase parameters, 257 subcase select optimize, 258 OSTR1, 277, 278 OUGV1, 280 output requests, 231 OUTPUT2, 176, 270, 271
S
sliding surface, 21, 33
INDEX
solution parameters, 183 SOL 109, 206 SOL 112, 206 SOL 27, 206 SOL 31, 206 solution sequences SOL 1, 180, 183 SOL 101, 180, 183 SOL 103, 180 SOL 105, 180, 194 SOL 106, 180, 186 SOL 107, 198 SOL 108, 180, 203 SOL 109, 180 SOL 110, 180, 198 SOL 111, 180, 203 SOL 112, 180 SOL 114, 180, 183 SOL 115, 180 SOL 118, 180, 203 SOL 129, 180, 209 SOL 147, 180 SOL 26, 180, 203 SOL 27, 180 SOL 28, 180, 198 SOL 29, 180, 198 SOL 3, 180 SOL 30, 180, 203 SOL 37, 180 SOL 47, 180, 183 SOL 48, 180 SOL 5, 180, 194 SOL 66, 180, 186 SOL 77, 180, 194 SOL 99, 180, 209 solution types, 180 SPC1, 158 SPCD, 158 SPCFORCES, 235 static data, 156 STRAIN, 235 STRESS, 235 structural damping, 199, 208, 210 supported entities, 8
TIC, 164 TIME, 184 time dependent, 157 tolerances, 176, 273, 276 translation parameters, 176, 273, 276 TSTEPNL, 219
V
VECTOR, 235 VU mesh, 13
W
warnings, 342 WTMASS, 184, 190
X
XDB, 176, 270, 274
T
TEMP, 161 temperature, 155, 161 TEMPP1, 162 TEMPRB, 161

(Ebook) - Engineering - MSC Patran MSC Nastran Preference Guide - Volume 1 - Structural Analysis

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

(Ebook) - Engineering - MSC Patran MSC Nastran Preference Guide - Volume 1 - Structural Analysis

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

C O N T E N T S

MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide Volume 1: Structural Analysis

Purpose, 2 MSC.Nastran Product Information, 3

Review of Delete Form, 334 Deleting an MSC.Nastran Job, 335

MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide, Volume 1: Structural Analysis

s Purpose s MSC.Nastran Product Information

MSC.Nastran Product Information

MSC/PATRAN MSC/NASTRAN Preference Guide, Volume 1: Structural Analysis

Introduction to Building a Model

Currently Supported MSC.Nastran Input Options

Supported MSC.Nastran Executive Control Commands Command

Supported MSC.Nastran Case Control Commands

VECTOR VELOCITY GPSDCON GPFORCE NLLOAD SET SURFACE VOLUME

FREQUENCY GPSTRESS MAXLINES

Supported MSC.Nastran Bulk Data Entries

Pages 12, 141, 180, 186 169

EIGC EIGR EIGRL

177, 326 104

106 177, 326

Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference

Associate with Geometry Auto Execute Node Location List [0 0 0]

IsoMesh Parameters... Node Coordinate Frames... Surface List

Define Terms... Define Terms...

MPC Type Explicit

MPC Type Rigid (Fixed)

Analysis Type Structural

MPC Type RROD

Analysis Type Structural

x Create Dependent x x Create Independent

x Create Dependent x Create Independent x

Independent Terms (Min = 1, Max = 2) Nodes 1 2

x Create Dependent x x Create Independent x

Independent Terms (Min = 1, Max = 6) Nodes 1 2

x Create Dependent x x Create Independent x

x Create Dependent x x Create Independent x

x Create Dependent x x Create Independent

x Create Dependent x x Create Independent x

x Create Dependent x x Create Independent x

x Create Dependent x x Create Independent x

x Automatic x User Specified x

x Axis 1 x Axis 2 x x Axis 3 x

Superelement List Superelement_1 List of existing superelements.

Superelement Name Superelement_1 Superelement Description Left Wing of DC-10

Element Definition Group Group_Superelement_1

Select Boundary Nodes...

Select Boundary Nodes

Select Boundary Nodes

Select Boundary Nodes

Allows for manual selection of boundary nodes.

Remove selected nodes from the Selected Boundary Nodes box.

Selected Boundary Nodes

Add selected nodes to the Selected Boundary Nodes box.

Lists the existing materials with the specified directionality.

MSC.Nastran Structural Input Properties...

Change Material Status...

Generates a form that is used to define the material properties.

Option 1 Linear Elastic Nonlinear

Test Data Coefficients von Mises Tresca Mohr-Coulomb Drucker-Prager

von Mises Tresca Mohr-Coulomb Drucker-Prager

Option 1 Linear Elastic Linear Elastic Linear Elastic Elastoplastic

von Mises Tresca Mohr-Coulomb DruckerPrager

von Mises Tresca Mohr-Coulomb Drucker-Prager